FCE Fast Class

READING
FCE FAST CLASS
WRITING
GRAMMAR VOCABULARY
Contents
Grammar Practice ...........................................................................................................................................................3 - 45
Grammar Reference......................................................................................................................................................48 - 95
Reading.......................................................................................................................................................................96 - 135
Key Word Transformation.......................................................................................................................................... 137-146
VOCABULARY .
Writing .................................................................................................................................................................... 148 167
Answer Key 217-254
2
GRAMMAR PRACTICE
3
NEW FAST CLASS GRAMMAR EXERCISES UNIT 1
Grammar Indirect/Reporting Questions Exercise 1
Complete the second question so that it has a similar meaning to the first one. Use 35 words.
1. How old are you? Can you tell me ----- ?
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
2. What time is it? Do you happen to know ----- ?
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
3. Would your sister like a drink? Can you find out ----- a drink?
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
4. What time does your train get in? Can you let me know what time ---- ?
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
5. Can you meet me for lunch? Will you let me know ----- for lunch?
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
MODALS can, could, be able to Exercise 2
More than one answer may be possible.
1. ---you lend me some money until tomorrow?
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
2. Im afraid I ---- understand a word hes saying!
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
3. ----to speak English when you were at primary school?
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
4. ---you come to football practice on Saturday?
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
5. It was a pity that I --- to come to the party last night.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
6. As we walked through the woods, we----hear a bird singing. It was beautiful.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
7. We ---- go to the disco tomorrow night if you like.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
8. You ---- go home if youve finished your test.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
4
MODALS must, mustnt, must be, cant be, have been Exercise 3
must be/have been, cant be/have been, must/mustnt
Choose the best option, A, B or C, to complete the sentences.
1. plane ............. delayed. My sister was supposed to arrive an hour ago.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
a) must have been b) cant have c) mustnt be
2. You ............. bring any food or drink into the library. Its not allowed.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
a) must be b) mustnt have c) cant
3. Everyone ............. hand in the homework tomorrow morning, otherwise it wont be marked.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
a) can b) must c) mustnt
4. Sam ............. exhausted today. He was up until one oclock this morning.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
a) cant be b) must be c) mustnt be
5. You ............. tired. You just got up!
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
a) cant be b) mustnt be c) can be
6. You ............. cross the road until youve looked carefully in both directions.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
a) must b) can c) mustn't
7. The test ............. that difficult because you all passed with good marks.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
a) mustnt b) cant have been c) must have been
8. I think that pie we had ............. past its sell-by date. I dont feel well this morning.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
a) must be b) cant have been c) must have been
MODALS have got to Exercise 4

Complete the sentences with the correct form of the informal have got to and these verbs.
revise move write answer buy
1. Dad cant go out tonight because he --- a report for work.
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
2. Dont forget that we --- the vocabulary before tomorrow mornings test.
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
3. Oh, I nearly forgot! I --- some milk on my way home today.
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
4. Janets mum has been offered a job in a city in the North, so she --- house.
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
5. Do you think we ---- all the questions correctly to pass the exam?
5
MODALS didnt need to, didnt have to, neednt have Exercise 6
Complete the sentences with the correct form of these verbs below and didnt need to, didn't have to or neednt have.
buy write go postpone arrive take
1. Penny ---- at school so early because the English lesson was cancelled.
____________________________________________________________________________________________________
2. Luckily I ----- a ticket for the concert because my friend James had a spare one.
____________________________________________________________________________________________________
3. We were happy that the air traffic controllers strike was cancelled because we----- our holiday.
____________________________________________________________________________________________________
4. After we came back from the supermarket, we realized that we---- shopping. There was still a lot of food in the fridge.
____________________________________________________________________________________________________
5. Fortunately we ----- the train because someone offered us a lift.
____________________________________________________________________________________________________
6. You ----- a letter to thank me for the present, but it was very nice of you.
____________________________________________________________________________________________________
WHICH MODAL? Exercise 7

Choose the correct words to complete the conversation.
Jane: Do you think it 1---- rain this afternoon? (might, cant, should)
Max: Its certainly a possibility. Why?
Jane: Well, we 2 ---- go for a birthday picnic if you feel like it! Ive bought all the food. (must, could, may not)
Max: Thats really kind of you. But dont you think we 3 ---- tell the other students in the class that were going? (must
not, may, should) They 4 ----want to come too. (can, have to, may)
Jane: I dont think we 5 ---- to do that. (need, must, shouldnt)
Max: Why not?
Jane: Because it was their idea in the first place!
Max: Oh, I see. Well, it 6 ---- have been a secret plan because nobody in the class told me anything. (must, may, cant)
Jane: I know. We wanted to keep it a surprise just in case it rained and we7 ---- go after all! (must not, could not, may)
Anyway, you 8 ---- ask any more questions, or youll spoil the surprise! (must, might not, mustnt)
____________________________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________________________
6
PHRASAL VERBS Exercise 8
Complete sentences 16 with a phrasal verb so that they have a similar meaning to the first sentences.
Use the correct form of a word from A, and a word from B to form the phrasal verbs.
A take come give put pick (x2)
B up (x3) after out off
1. Could you please collect the sheets from the laundry? Would you mind ---- the sheets from the laundry?
____________________________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________________________
2. When was the film released on DVD? When did the film ---- on DVD?
____________________________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________________________
3. We will have to postpone the meeting until next week. The meeting will have to be ---- until next week.
____________________________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________________________
4. I had no difficulty learning the language when I lived in Italy. I quickly ---- the language when I lived in Italy.
____________________________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________________________
5. Are you like your parents? Do you ---- your parents?
____________________________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________________________
6. Pete has just stopped smoking. Pete has just ---- smoking.
____________________________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________________________
7
QUESTION TAGS Exercise 9
Question tags with modal verbs Complete the sentences with a suitable question tag.
Example: You are coming to the party, arent you?
1. You should have told me earlier. --------?
____________________________________________________________________________________________________
2. I dont need to get up early tomorrow, --------?
____________________________________________________________________________________________________
3. Ted and Sue can speak Japanese, --------?
____________________________________________________________________________________________________
4. You were able to get some rest on the train, --------?
____________________________________________________________________________________________________
5. They might have missed the bus, --------?
____________________________________________________________________________________________________
6. Your parents cant have forgotten to pick us up, --------?
____________________________________________________________________________________________________
7. John had to work late last night, --------?
____________________________________________________________________________________________________
8
GRAMMAR EXERCISES UNIT 2
Present simple or continuous? Exercise 1

Choose the verb (A, B or C) that is not generally used in the present continuous form.
1.
a) write b) believe c) cry
2.
a) hate b) live c) make
3.
a) leave b) watch c) know
4.
a) prepare b) work c) need
5
a) study b) mean c) explore
6
a) own b) calculate c) grow
7
a) read b) stay c) prefer
8
a) belong to b) cook c) rise
9
a) play b) seem c) run
10
a) understand b) do c) give
11
a) explain b) pack c) like
12
a) develop b) realise c) contribute

Complete the sentences. Write the correct form of the verbs in brackets.
a) At the moment, my sister 1 ---- (do) her homework and it 2 ---- (rain) outside.
_______________________________________________________________________________________________________
b) My uncle 3 ---- (own) a small boat, but he only 4 ---- (go)sailing in it at weekends.
_______________________________________________________________________________________________________
c) We 5 ---- (learn) all about Chinese culture in our class this term because some students from China 6 ---- (visit) our school.
_______________________________________________________________________________________________________
d) Although I 7 ---- (prefer) a cool climate to a hot one, I 8 ---- (hate) the idea of having a wet and miserable summer.
_______________________________________________________________________________________________________
e) I 9 ---- (know) I have to finish this essay before I can go out, so that's why I 10 ---- (hurry) to get it done.
9
_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

Complete the pairs of sentences. Write the present simple or continuous form of the verbs in brackets.
1. I ---- it's going to be a fine day today. (think)
___________________________________________________________________________________________________________
2. What ---- about? (think)
___________________________________________________________________________________________________________
3. ---- that people spend too much time watching television? (you / feel)
___________________________________________________________________________________________________________
4. I have to sit down. I ---- very well at the moment. (not feel)
___________________________________________________________________________________________________________
5. My aunt ---- a baby. (expect)
___________________________________________________________________________________________________________
6. I ---- our guests will come now. It's far too late. (not expect)
___________________________________________________________________________________________________________
7. Whatever I do, I always ---- to do my best. (try)
___________________________________________________________________________________________________________
8. What on earth ---- to cook with all those different ingredients? (you / try)
___________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Using Adverbs Exercise 4

Choose the best word (A, B or C) to complete the sentences. (Write the sentences completely)
1, We ---- watch TV after 10 o'clock because we're too tired.
___________________________________________________________________________________________________________
a) often b) hardly ever c) normally
2. I joined a fitness club. I ---- go twice a week, unless I'm feeling lazy.
___________________________________________________________________________________________________________
a) generally b) rarely c) yet
3. You ---- haven't told me what you would like for dinner. I've asked you three times.
___________________________________________________________________________________________________________
a) already b) sometimes c) still
4 I ---- think that life is too short for all the things I want to do. It's sad, but perhaps everyone else thinks like that from time to time.
___________________________________________________________________________________________________________
a) often b) already c) hardly ever

5. What do you ---- have for breakfast?
___________________________________________________________________________________________________________
a) still b) rarely c) usually
6. Haven't you finished your homework----?
___________________________________________________________________________________________________________
a) already b) yet c) still
7. Our family ---- go on a winter skiing holiday in January. We've done it for years.
___________________________________________________________________________________________________________
10
a) hardly ever b) never c) always
to do, to be doing or to be done Exercise 5

Complete the text. Write the correct infinitive form (to do, to be doing or to be done) of the verbs in brackets.
Write the sentences completely
Every country's culture ought 1 ---- (preserve) , and perhaps the best way 2 ---- (do) this is by ensuring that the
country's own language survives. Even if we all learn 3 ---- (speak) an international language, we still want our
own language 4 ---- (use) by the people who live in our country. Unfortunately, some languages seem ----
(disappear) as fewer and fewer people speak them. Some minority languages which people are unsuccessfully
trying6 ---- (keep) alive are said 7 ------- (die out) because they are too difficult 8 ---- (learn) ! We are lucky that
we live in a world where communication in international languages is quick and easy, but minority languages
ought 9 ---- (protect) too, to make sure that they survive.
___________________________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________________________
________
Infinitive Forms Exercise 6
Choose the correct infinitive form of to do to match the descriptions.
to have been done, to be done, to be doing, to do, to have done, to have been doing
1. perfect infinitive _________________________________
2. simple infinitive _________________________________
3. perfect continuous infinitive _________________________________
4. perfect passive infinitive _________________________________
5. continuous infinitive _________________________________
6. passive infinitive _________________________________
11
Infinitive Forms Exercise 7
Choose the correct infinitive form (A, B or C) to complete the sentences.
1. The person the police want to question appears ---- abroad for the last few years.
______________________________________________________________________________________________
a) to be living b) to have been living c) to live
2. The local council seem ---- a new office block in the town centre, but nobody has actually said what the building's
going to be when it's finished.
______________________________________________________________________________________________
a) to build b) to have built c) to be building
3. The author is thought ---- the script for a film adaptation of his latest novel.
______________________________________________________________________________________________
a) to write b) to be writing c) to have been written
4. Last week's secret meeting between the two heads of state is thought ---- in Switzerland.
______________________________________________________________________________________________
a) to hold b) to have been holding c) to have been held
5. I'm afraid the mistake has been made, and there is nothing more .......... about it.
______________________________________________________________________________________________
a) to be done b) to be doing c) to have done
6. Picasso's famous 1937 painting Guernica is said .......... the history of art.
______________________________________________________________________________________________
a) to be changing
b) to have changed
c) to have been changed
12
GAMMAR EXERCISES UNIT 3The Past Simple Exercise 1
Past simple forms
Write a paragraph with given words Use the past simple form of the verbs.
eat wear - sleep - sit teach swim set drink see write give meet read - drive become
______________________________________________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________________________________________
The Past Simple Exercise 2
Past simple or past continuous?
Complete the sentences. Write the correct form of the verbs in bold.
begin / walk
1 ---- to work when it 2 --- to rain.
______________________________________________________________________________________________________________
blow / shine / arrive
The sun 3 --- and a light breeze 4 ---- when we 5 ---- home.
______________________________________________________________________________________________________________
ring / watch
We 6 ---- television when the phone 7 ----- .
______________________________________________________________________________________________________________
call / do
The children 8 --- their homework when a neighbour 9 ---- .
______________________________________________________________________________________________________________
shop / meet
Paula 10 ----- an old friend when she 11 ---- in town.
______________________________________________________________________________________________________________
hear / listen / cook
Carl 12 ---- to the radio and 13 --- dinner when he 14----- the news.
______________________________________________________________________________________________________________
13
Past simple or past continuous?
Complete the text. Write the correct past simple or past continuous form of the verbs in brackets.
It was Friday, the first day of our skiing holiday, and my friend Jason and I 1 ---- (ski) down the mountain together. We 2 ----
(want) to catch the ski lift back down to our hotel. It 3 ---- (get) dark and we 4 --- (begin) to feel rather tired, so we 5 ----
(look) forward to getting back to the resort. Imagine our surprise when we 6 --- (arrive) at the ski lift to find that it had
closed for the night. I 7 ---- (check) my watch. It suddenly 8 --- (occur) to me that I hadnt bothered to change it from the
English time. It was, of course, an hour slow. There was only one thing for it we would have to ski down the mountain. We
9 ---- (make) our way down the piste leading to the valley below when we 10 ----- (see) the small, dark shapes of skiers
below us. They had spotted us, and they 11 --- (shout) at us and waving their arms. A few minutes later, we 12 ---- (catch) up
with the small group of people. Apparently, they had been sent to find us when someone had noticed that we hadnt
arrived back at the hotel.
______________________________________________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________________________________________
14
Past simple, past continuous + when and while
Write the correct form of the verbs in brackets to complete the sentences.
a) 1---- ( have ) an accident when I 2 --- ( cycle ) to work because I 3 --- ( look ) at something else and not the road.
______________________________________________________________________________________________________________
b) Julie 4 --- ( work ) for a short time in a caf while she5 ( study ) in Germany because she 6--- (need ) some extra
money to go on holiday.
______________________________________________________________________________________________________________
c) Sam 7 --- ( sit ) on the train to Durham, having a coffee. He 8 --- ( talk ) to another passenger when the train suddenly
9 --- ( stop ) in the middle of nowhere.
______________________________________________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________________________________________
d) I 10---- ( forget ) my passport because I 11 --- (speak ) to a friend on my mobile when the taxi 12 ---- ( arrive ) to take
me to the airport.
______________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Past simple and past continuous passive
Complete the second sentence so that it has a similar meaning to the first sentence.
Use the past simple or past continuous passive. Write between 25 words.
1. The box office issued tickets for the concert to students.

Tickets for the concert ---- by the box office.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
2. They were serving dinner to the hotel guests on the terrace.
Dinner ---- to the hotel guests on the terrace.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
3. The ski instructors were giving us a demonstration.
We ----- a demonstration by the ski instructors.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
4. A well-known chef gave me the recipe for this dish.
The recipe for this dish ---- by a well-known chef.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
5. The tour guide was showing us around the museum when the fire started.
We ----- around the museum by the tour guide when the fire started.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
6. They didnt tell us about the accident until the next day.
We ---- about the accident until the next day.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
15
Used to do / would do 6
Choose the correct words to complete the text.
Use each phrase only once. There is one extra phrase which you do not need.
My great aunt 1--- very fond of the mountains. Every year she 2 ---- a small cottage in a village in the mountains. All the
family3 it in turns to go and stay there with her for at least a week. Every morning she 4 ---- at the crack of dawn, fling
open the shutters and make us a delicious breakfast.
We 5 ---- on long walks if the weather was fine, and we always took a packed lunch that she made for us. She 6 ----
anyone else make it in fact, she 7 ---- all the cooking in that house. In the evenings we8 anything at all! We always 9 --
--- home too exhausted to do anything but go straight to bed!
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
16
Past Simple, Past Continuous or Would 7
Complete the text. Write the correct form of one of the verbs below.
Use the past simple, past continuous or would.
become cook tell set check find travel rise sleep decide aim wear arrive spot
It was a beautiful afternoon, so we 1 ---- to try our hand at drifting. Drifting is really a safe way to do a bit of white-water
rafting for beginners. The instructor 2 ----- us that on this particular stretch of river, if it had been raining, the water levels 3
------ and the surface4 quite rough. Then he 5 ----- that everyone in the group 6 ---- a life jacket.
We 7 ---- down the river in our large, rubber dinghy when we suddenly 8 --- the white, frothing rapids ahead. Somewhat
alarmed, we 9 ---- the dinghy straight at the centre of the churning waves and, with some difficulty 10 ---- our way through
the rapids. We eventually11 at our destination further downstream just as the sun 12---- . Later, we 13---- a satisfying
meal around the camp fire, watching the flames flickering. But before they had died out completely, everyone 14 ----
soundly in their tents.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
17
UNIT 4 Exercise 1
Future forms
Choose the correct use (A, B or C) of the future forms in the sentences.
1. Im going to stay in and wash my hair tonight.
A a prediction B an intention C a promise
2. Its going to snow!
A probability B an intention C an arrangement
3. Tidal power will be one of the main sources of energy in the future.
A an intention B possibility C a prediction
4. Im catching the 6.30 train tonight.
A probability B possibility C a definite arrangement
5. Shall I carry that bag for you?
A an intention B an offer C determination
6. What will you be doing this time next year?
A asking about an action which will be finished at a certain time
B asking about a definite arrangement
C asking about an action which will be taking place at a certain time
7. I will pass my exam!
A determination B a promise C an arrangement
8. Well have completed Unit 4 by the end of the lesson.
A an arrangement
B an action that will be finished at a certain time
C a prediction
9. Ill buy you a new bicycle before we go on holiday.
A a promise B an intention C an arrangement
Future Forms Questions - Exercise 2
Question - Future forms
Complete the sentences. Write the most suitable future form of the verbs in brackets.
More than one answer may be possible.
1. Many of the worlds natural resources --- (run out) in the next 50 years.
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
2. Do you think it ---- (rain)? The sky looks very black.
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
3. ---- (I / cook) dinner? You look tired!
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
4. Next week at this time I ---- (travel) to Greece.
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
5. I ----- (write) to you every day when Im on holiday I mean it!
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
6. We ----- (do) all our exams by the end of the month.
____________________________________________________________________________________________________
7. Dont forget that we ---- (have) the weekly staff meeting at nine oclock.
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
8. I ----- (finish) this work before tomorrow morning even if it takes me all night!
18
Future Continuous or Future Perfect - Exercise 3
Future continuous or future perfect?
Complete the sentences. Write the correct future continuous or future perfect form of the verbs in brackets.
1. I have absolutely no idea what I ---- (do) this time next year.
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
2. We ---- (finish) this exercise in a couple of minutes.
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
3. ----- (you / stay) with friends when youre in New York next month?
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
4. I ---- (complete) all my revision by Friday.
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
5. Where ----- (the team / play) this weekend?
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
6. We can eat when you arrive we ----- (not have) dinner by then.
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
Future Exercise 4
Other ways of talking about the future
For questions 17, complete the second sentence so that it has a similar meaning to the first sentence.
You must use between 46 words, including the word in brackets.
1. I was finishing the last question in the exam when the fire bell rang.
I ----the last question in the exam when the fire bell rang. (about)
_________________________________________________________________________________________________
2. The performance is starting any minute now. The performance ----any minute now. (due)
_________________________________________________________________________________________________
3. I was going to get into the car when I noticed the parking ticket on the windscreen.
I -----into the car when I noticed the parking ticket on the windscreen. (point)
_________________________________________________________________________________________________
4. We were going on a skiing holiday next week, but Kelly has broken her ankle.
We ------on a skiing holiday next week, but Kelly has broken her ankle. (due)
_________________________________________________________________________________________________
5. We were thinking of cooking some sausages on the barbecue when it started to rain.
We ------some sausages on the barbecue when it started to rain. (about)
_________________________________________________________________________________________________
6. The burglar was going to break into the house when he was arrested.
The burglar -----into the house when he was arrested. (point)
_________________________________________________________________________________________________
7. They are holding the protest march in Trafalgar Square. The protest march -----in Trafalgar Square. (due)
19
________________________________________________________________________________________________
Question Error Correction Exercise 5
Tick the correct sentences. Correct one word in the incorrect sentences.
1. I wont be coming to the party on Saturday.
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
2. Shall I help you to clean the house?
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
3. This time tomorrow Ill be travel to Paris with my boyfriend.
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
4. Will the film on TV have finish by midnight?
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
5. We were on the point of have dinner when some unexpected guests arrived.
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
6. The train is due to arrive at 7.15.
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
7. I hope well being spending the summer by the sea this year.
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
Expressions of Time Exercise 6

Expressions of time
Choose the correct words to complete the sentences.
Use each word once only. There is one extra word you do not need.
1. Ive got an appointment at the dentists --- Wednesday afternoon.
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
2. The factory will close --- six months time.
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
3. What will we all be doing two years --- now?
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
4. This time --- week, Ill be lying on a beach in Jamaica.
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
5. Ill buy you a small car ---- you have passed your driving test.
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
6. Ill be having a job interview ---- eleven oclock tomorrow.
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
7. Ill have finished tidying up my room ---- lunch time.
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
20
Bound to / Likely to Exercise 7
Write the correct form of be bound to or be likely to.
1. It will definitely rain when we are on holiday. It always does.

It---- rain when we are on holiday. It always does.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
2. Do you think you will come to the party?
Do you think you ---- come to the party?
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
3. I know that Laura will be furious when she finds out that you broke her laptop.
Laura ----- be furious when she finds out that you broke her laptop.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
4. David really wants to get the job, but I dont think he will get it.
David really wants to get the job, but I dont think he ----- get it.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
5. The roads are certainly going to be slippery this morning because of the icy weather.
The roads ---- be slippery this morning because of the icy weather.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
HAD BETTER (NOT) Exercise 8

Complete the sentences with the verbs below and the correct form of had better (not).
go out find tell apologise forget ring have
1. I -----an early night tonight because my exams start tomorrow.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
2. You ----- your Dads birthday. You did last year, and he was really upset!
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
3. If you want to earn some extra money, you ----- yourself a part-time job.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
4. You ---- James that youre going out with his ex-girlfriend. Hell be hopping mad!
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
5. We ----- for a taxi its getting late.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
6. Jenny is really angry about what you said. You ---- to her.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
7. The sea is really rough. We ----- in the boat today.
21
UNIT 5 Adverbs Exercise 1
Choose the most suitable word in brackets and Write the adverb form of the word to complete the sentences.
1. Pablo was nervous, but he spoke very--- in front of the huge audience at the conservation conference. (confident /
free)
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
2. Although adult turtles are very big, they can swim----- fast. (total / surprising)
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
3. The young turtles made their way ---- out to sea. (quick / lucky)
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
4. We watched ----- as the creatures disappeared from sight.
After months of looking after them, it was hard to see them go. ( emotional / scarce)
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
5. Ive never been to the turtle farm, but ----- its really big. (original / apparent)
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
6. We watched in amazement as the little turtles------ made their way across the sand towards the sea. (gradual / free)
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
UNIT 5 Making Comparisons Exercise 2

Making comparisons
Complete the comparative sentences with the adjectives below and the words in brackets. Write between 34 words,
including the adjectives and the words given. Use each adjective once. There is one extra adjective that you do not need.
stressful expensive quick difficult healthy exciting bad
1. Life on an island is----- it is on the mainland because there is not so much to worry about. (less)
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
2. The traffic in big cities is ----- it is in small towns. (far)
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
3. Its ----- to find a job in a big city as it is in the countryside because there are lots of big companies. (not)
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
4. For young people, cities are ----- islands because there is more for them to do. (much)
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
5. People who live on islands are often ----- city residents because they get more fresh air and exercise. (lot
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
6. Sometimes cycling to work in the city is ---- driving because you dont get stuck in the traffic when youre on a bike. (as)
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
22
UNIT 5 Present Perfect Simple or Continuous Exercise 3
Complete the sentences. Write the correct present perfect simple or continuous form of the verbs in brackets.
1. Oh dear! You --- your jeans! (tear)
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
2. What ---- all morning? (you do)
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
3. My grandparents ---- a flat in the town centre. (just buy)
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
4. ---- horse-riding? (you / ever try)
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
5. I ----about giving up my job for a long time now. (think)
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
6. This is the first time I ---- this part of the country. (visit)
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
7. My clothes are dirty because I ----- the house. (paint)
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
8. Im sorry, but I ----- one of your plates. (break)
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
9. ----- that new film about gangsters? (you / see)
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
10. You should have a rest. You ---- on that car all afternoon. (work)
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
UNIT 5 Past Simple and Present Perfect with SINCE and FOR Exercise 4
Complete the sentences. Write the correct form of the verbs in brackets and for or since.
A. I 1---- ----- (not be) to the beach 2 ----- last year.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
B. Yesterday, my sister 3 ---- (wait) for a bus 4 ----- over half an hour.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
C. Ever 5 ----- we 6 ------ (come) to live here, we 7 ----- (be) very happy in this house.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
D. It 8 ---- (be) a long time 9 ------ Ted and I10 ---- (go) to the cinema.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
E. Dave and Janet 11 -----(be) best friends 12----- years, but then they 13 -----(have) a big fight.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
F. My family 14 ----(live) in this city 15---- three years now.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
G. In the years 16----- my uncle 17---- (leave) Italy, he 18 ----(never speak) Italian.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
23
UNIT 5 If + Present Perfect Exercise 6
Use the present perfect tense and will in each sentence.
1. If our visitors 1 --- ( not arrive ) by nine, we 2 ---- ( start ) dinner without them.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
2. We 3 ---- ( buy ) some sandwiches if you 4 ---- ( not have ) any lunch.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
3. If the plane 5---- ( already / land ), our relatives 6 ----( be ) at the meeting area in the arrival lounge.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
4. If you 7 ---- ( never / be ) to the theatre before, we 8 --- ( take ) you.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
5. Brad 9 --- ( not be able ) to come to the party if his car 10 ---- ( break ) down.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
UNIT 5 CORRECTION 7
Tick the correct sentences. Find and correct one word in the incorrect sentences.
1. ______ Ive been studying English since four years.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
2. ______ This is the third time Ive been to this restaurant.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
3. ______We cant go out. You havent finished tidying your room still.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
4. ______ Ive been waiting for you for four oclock.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
5. ______ Ana has been studying English for three years now.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
6. ______ Hasnt John finished his homework already?
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
7. ______ Paul has yet left youve just missed him.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
8. ______ How long has Gina been living in Russia since?
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
9. ______ Have you seen him for last week?
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
10. ______ My aunt has been living in the same house for twenty years now
_________________________________________________________________________________________________
24
UNIT 6 Past Perfect with Scarcely, Hardly, No Sooner Exercise 1
Past perfect with scarcely, hardly and no sooner. Complete the second sentence so that it has a similar meaning to the first
sentence. Write between 4 and 5 words.
1 I had just finished writing when the teacher collected the tests.
I had no sooner ----- the teacher collected the tests.
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
2 We arrived just as the party ended.
We had scarcely ----- the party ended.
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
3 They had to leave as soon as they finished breakfast.
They had hardly ----- they had to leave.
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
4 Just after we left home, it began to rain.
We had scarcely----- it began to rain.
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
5 As soon as he woke up, Sam realised that he was late.
Sam had no sooner----- he realised that he was late.
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
UNIT 6 -CAUSATIVE USE of HAVE- Exercise 2

Complete the dialogues using these verbs and the causative use of have.
Write between 3 and 5 words. You will need to add pronouns.
print repair design clean build paint
1A These windows are really dirty. B I know. Im ------- tomorrow morning.
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
2A The house is really big, but I dont like the grey walls.
B Yes, but theyll be fine after we ------- a different colour.
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
3A Where is your car? B Its broken down, so Im ------- .
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
4A Youve got a new garage. B Yes, we have. We ------- last month.
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
5A There were some great costumes in the film. B Yes. The director ------- by Natalie Carlucci.
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
6A You cant change the date of the party now. B Why not?
A Because of the invitations. Weve already------- .
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
25
UNIT 6 PAST SIMPLE or PAST PERFECT - Exercise 3
Complete the sentences using the words in brackets. Write one verb in the past simple and one in the past perfect.
1. After I 1 ------ (buy) the shoes, I 2 ------ (realise) that they were a bit too small.
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
2. We 3 ------ (board) the train after we 4 ------ (get) the tickets.
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
3. I 5 (tell) you that I 6 (seen) the film before.
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
4. Sharon 7 ------ (go) to Italy twice before she 8 ------ (visit) Rome for the first time.
UNIT 6 PAST SIMPLE or PAST PERFECT / active or passive - Exercise 4
Past simple or past perfect, active or passive? Choose the correct words to complete the text.
Last night, the emergency services 1---- (called, had called, were called) out to a warehouse fire in Eastbridge. According to
one source, it appeared that the fire 2 ---- (started, had started, had been started) deliberately, although no one yet knows
why. When the firefighters 3 (arrived, had arrived, were arrived) on the scene, the fire 4 ---- (already spread, had already
spread, was already spread) to a nearby factory. It 5 ---- (took, had been taken, was taken) the crew over six hours to
make the area safe. One officer 6 ---- (was told, told, had been told) reporters that he 7 ---- (had never seen, never saw,
was never seen) so much damage caused in such a short time before. By morning, the fire 8 ---- (had brought, brought,
had been brought) under control.
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
26
UNIT 6 PAST PERFECT SIMPLE / PAST CONTINUOUS - Exercise 5
Complete the sentences.
Write the correct past perfect simple or past continuous form of these verbs:
visit try read rain do eat
1. When we went inside, I remembered that I ----- in the restaurant before.
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
2. It ----- for hours, and the roads were starting to become flooded.
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
3. I ----- London several times before I decided to go and work there.
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
4. How long did you say you ----- your current job?
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
5. Jim mentioned that he ----- for ages to get a really cheap flight to Spain, but he still hadnt found one.
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
6. I ----- a lot of travel articles about China before I actually went there for the first time.
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
UNIT 6 PAST SIMPLE, PAST PERFECT SIMPLE, PAST PERFECT CONT. - Exercise 6
Write the correct form of the verbs to complete the sentences. Use each verb once only.
be arrive wake finish meet rain leave know can (not) get work
a) When we 1 ------ up in the morning, we could see that it 2 ------ heavily all night.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
b) Once we 3 ------ Angelas fianc, we 4 ------ that he 5 ------ the right person for her.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
c) I 6 ------ back into the house because I 7 ------ my keys in my desk at work.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
d) By the time Janet 8 ------ home, I 9 ------ hard in the garden for hours and I 10 ------ planting the new trees.
e)
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
27
UNIT 6 TOO MUCH/MANY/NOT ENOUGH Exercise 7
too much / many, not enough
too much, enough, too many
1. Im sorry, but we just havent got ------ money to go on holiday this year.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
2. Well have to hire two coaches. There are ------ students to fit into one coach.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
3. Peters decided not to buy a car. It would cost ------ to run.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
4. Some classes have more than forty students in them. I think thats far ------ .
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
5. You spend ------ time watching TV. You should find something else to do.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
6. Maria cant come to the cinema tonight. She hasnt got ------ time.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
UNIT 6 A LITTLE/VERY LITTLE/A FEW/VERY FEW Exercise 8

a little / very little/ a few / very few
Choose the correct words to match the meanings.
1. a small, but convenient quantity: _________________________________

2. not much : _________________________________
3. a small, but convenient number : _________________________________
4. not many : _________________________________
UNIT6 A LITTLE/VERY LITTLE/A FEW/VERY FEW Exercise 9

a little / very little, a few / very few
1. We have ------ friends in London whom we visit whenever we can.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
2. Unfortunately I have ------ free time at the moment.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
3. Its a pity, but there are ------ TV programmes that I really enjoy watching.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
28
4. We have ------ spare money so we could buy a new TV this weekend.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
5. I hated living in that ugly house so there are ------ things that I miss about the place.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
6. We cant buy that sofa because its too big. Weve got ------ space in the living room as it is.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
7. The sauce will be nicer if you put ------ pepper into it.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
8. Were going to be there all summer and we cant swim all day. Im going to take ------ good books with me.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
UNIT6 A LITTLE/VERY LITTLE/A FEW/VERY FEW Exercise 10

a little / very little, a few / very few
Write in the correct words to complete the sentences.
1. Would you like some more cake? Theres -------- left.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
2. Do you know its Alans birthday on Saturday? I have -------- ideas for his present.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
3. Ill just have -------- milk in my coffee, thank you.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
4. There is -------- left to do so were hoping to finish today.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
5. -------- people came to the meeting. We were quite disappointed.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
6. Ill come along in -------- minutes I just have to send an email.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
7. Can you hurry up, please? Theres -------- time left before the train goes.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
8. -------- people succeed in the music business.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
29
UNIT 7 Reporting Statements Exercise 1

Reporting statements
Tick the correct sentences. Find and correct one word in the incorrect sentences.
1. _____ Richard said that he had never climb a mountain before.

__________________________________________________________________________________________________
2. _____ My friend Jane said that she will see me that afternoon.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
3. _____ The film director said that all his films had been successful up to now.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
4. _____ The tour guide said that the coach has arrived five minutes early.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
5. _____ The organiser of the event said that everybody was having a good time.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
6. _____ Bill said that he is going to buy a surfboard, but he didnt buy one in the end.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
7. _____ Fiona says that she didnt like spiders. I think shes scared of them.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
UNIT 7 Reporting Imperatives Exercise 2

Reporting imperatives
Complete the second sentence using asked or told to report the first sentence.
Write 48 words.
1. Please do me a favour, Wendy said to me.

Wendy ----- a favour.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
2. Dont ever speak to me like that again, Jacob said to them.
Jacob ----- like that again.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
3. Take off your shoes, please, the shop assistant said to the children.
The shop assistant ------ shoes.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
4. Please tell me your address, the woman in the bank said to me.
The woman in the bank ----- address.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
30
UNIT 7 Reporting Questions Exercise 3
Reporting questions
Complete the second sentence to report the first sentence. Write between 46 words.
1. Who is coming to the cinema? Tom asked me. Tom asked me ------- to the cinema.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
2. Is anyone hungry? My mother asked us ------- hungry.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
3. Where is the museum? The man asked a passer-by ------- .
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
4. How long have you been waiting for me?
My girlfriend asked me how long ------- .
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
5. Will you phone me later?
My brother asked me ------- .
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
6. What time does the train leave?
The passenger asked us ------- .
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
UNIT 7 Reporting Verbs Exercise 4

Reporting verbs
Choose the correct reporting verb to complete each sentence.
There is one extra verb you do not need.
wondered, offered, suggested, asked, disagreed, warmed, threatened, complained
1. Paul ------ that we all went to the cinema.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
2. The policeman ------ the children that the road was very busy.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
3. The customer ------ to the waiter that the soup was cold.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
4. Molly looked up at the sky and ------ to herself how many stars there were in the universe.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
5. The teacher ------ to keep the children in school if they didnt behave.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
6. Dad ------ to help us paint the garage, but I said that we could do it on our own.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
7. Peters mother ------ him if he was sure that he wanted to go on the trip.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
31
UNIT 7 Reporting Speech Exercise 5
Reported speech
Complete the second sentence so that it has the speakers exact words from the first sentence.
Write 46 words.
1. The guard told the passenger not to put his feet on the seats. ------ on the seats.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
2. Francis asked me if I would like to go to the cinema at the weekend.
------ to the cinema at the weekend?
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
3. The teacher said that we had all been working very hard. ------ very hard.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
4. Darren asked me to lend him some money. ------ some money?
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
5. The judge warned the defendant not to lie to the jury.
------ to the jury!
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
6. The reporter asked a passer-by to comment on the protest.
------ comment on the protest?
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
7. The policeman told the suspect to get out of her car.
------ the car!
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
8. The passengers complained that the train was always late.
The train ------ !
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
UNIT 7 Reporting Speech Exercise 6

Reported Speech Key word transformations
Complete the second sentence so that it has a similar meaning to the first sentence, using the words given.
Do not change the word given.
Write between 25 words, including the word given.
1. Trains are running late, the guard said to us.

TOLD The guard ------ running late.
2. How does everyone feel the meeting went? Robin asked.
KNOW Robin wanted ------ that the meeting had gone.
3. Why dont we go for a boat trip?, my cousin said to me.
WENT My cousin ------ for a boat trip.
4. Will you be going to England in the summer? the teacher asked me.
IF The teacher asked ------ be going to England in the summer.
5. Please dont tell anyone what I said, Jane said to me.
BEGGED Jane ------ anyone what she had said.
32
UNIT 8 ORDER of ADJECTIVES Exercise 1

Choose the correct order of adjectives to complete the sentences 16.
1. I still remember the ------ afternoons that we spent at the beach when I was a child.
summer, fantastic, long fantastic, long, summer,
long, fantastic, summer,
2. They live in a ------ villa.

lovely, big, Spanish Spanish, lovely, big,
lovely, Spanish, big,
3. The police are looking for a ------ man.

blonde, tall, strange-looking tall, strange-looking, blonde,
strange-looking, tall, blonde,
4. Theres a(n) ------ restaurant on the corner of our street.

little, excellent, Italian Italian, excellent, little,
excellent, little, Italian
5. I bought a(n) ------ photo frame on the internet.

great, new, electronic electronic, great, new,
new, great, electronic
6. She wore a(n) ------ dress.

long, black, expensive-looking expensive-looking, black, long,
expensive-looking, long, black,
UNIT 8 CONDITIONALS Exercise 2

Choose the correct conditional form to match the sentences.
zero conditional, first conditional, second conditional, third conditional
1. ___________________________ If you pop round to my house tomorrow evening, Ill cook dinner for you.
2. ___________________________ If youd invited me to the party, I would have come.
3. ___________________________ If you boil vegetables for too long, they lose their vitamin content.
4. ___________________________ If I were you, Id take a holiday.
5. ___________________________ Glass breaks if you drop it.
6. ___________________________ Id never have come here on holiday if Id known how crowded it was.
7. ___________________________ I wouldnt take the job even if they offered me more money.
8. ___________________________ Ill call you tomorrow if I have time.
33
UNIT 8 ZERO CONDITIONAL Exercise 3
The zero conditional
Write the zero conditional sentences using the words given.
1. you / drop / an egg / it / break
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
2. I / eat / too much / I / always / put on / weight
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
3. people / take / regular exercise / they / stay fitter
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
4. you / leave / ice cream out of the freezer / it / melt
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
5. people / drive / above the speed limit / they / break the law
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
UNIT 8 FIRST CONDITIONAL Exercise 4

The first conditional
Write the correct form of these phrases to complete the first conditional sentences.
You will need to make some phrases negative.
enjoy it make yourself ill stop working help you visit Grandma get into the house be able to buy anything
1. If you worry about things too much, you ----- .
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
2. If you forget to take your wallet, you----- .
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
3. If we have time this weekend, we----- .
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
4. If you go to that new Italian restaurant, you ----- .
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
5. If youre having problems with your homework, I ----- .
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
6. If you dont recharge your mobile phone, it ----- .
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
7. If you lose your keys, you ----- .
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
34
UNIT 8 The Second Conditional Exercise 5
The second conditional
a If everyone 1 ----- (be) rich, nobody 2 ----- (want) to do any work!
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
b If you 3 ----- (tidy) your room, it 4 ----- (look) much better!
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
I 5 ----- (join) a band if I 6 ----- (can) play a musical instrument.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
d If we 7 ----- (go) by coach instead of by train, it 8 ----- (save) us some money.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
e You 9 (not make) so many mistakes if you 10 ----- (concentrate) a bit harder!
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
UNIT 8 The Third Conditional Exercise 6

The third conditional
Write the correct form of the verbs in brackets to complete the third conditional sentences.
a If I 1 ----- (not buy) that ring, I 2----- (have) enough money to go out to dinner last night.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
b If we 3 ----- (slow) down, we 4 ----- (see) the turning for the motorway in time.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
c My hair 5 ----- (not look) so terrible at the wedding if I 6 ----- (not go to) that new hairdressers.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
d If I 7 ----- (know) you were in town yesterday, I 8 ----- (meet) you for lunch.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
e If Paula 9 ----- (not fall) asleep on the train, she 10 ----- (not miss) her station.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
f If Sean 11 ----- (not play) football last night, he 12 ----- (not break) his ankle.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
g We 13 ----- (be able to) see more sights on our holiday if we 14 ----- (hire) a car.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
35
UNIT 8 Unless and In Case Exercise 7
unless and in case
Write unless or in case to complete the sentences.
1. Heres some extra money----- you need it.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
2. You wont pass your exams ----- you work harder.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
3. Take an umbrella just ----- it rains.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
4. ----- you hear from me before, Ill phone you next week.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
5. You wont be able to ski properly ----- you have some lessons.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
6. Heres my mobile number ----- you need to contact me urgently.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
UNIT 8 Zero, First, Second and Third Conditional Exercise 8
Zero, first, second and third conditional
Choose the correct form of the verbs (A, B or C) to complete the sentences.
1 If I were you, I ..... Sam.

A would marry
B will marry
C married
2We wouldnt have missed the train if we ..... our tickets earlier.
A bought
B hadnt bought
C had bought
3 If its fine tomorrow, we ..... to the open-air theatre.
A go
B 'll go
C 'd go
4 Your work suffers if you ..... enough sleep.
A dont get
B didnt get
C wont get
5 If you hadnt packed so many clothes, we ..... extra charges on the flight.
A didnt have to pay
B wouldnt have had to pay
C wouldnt have to pay
6 I ..... plenty of time to get ready tomorrow morning if I remember to set the alarm tonight.
A 'll have had
B. 'll be having
C 'll have
36
UNIT 8 Zero, First, Second and Third Conditional Exercise 9
Other forms of the zero, first, second and third conditional
Choose the correct form of the verbs (A, B or C) to complete the sentences.
1 If you ..... to the supermarket now, could you get me some eggs?
A have gone
B are going
C would go
2 We ..... on time for the concert if we hadnt got caught in that traffic jam.
A might be
B might been
C might have been
3 If you ..... TV tonight, you might see the news about Jim.
A watch
B will watch
C would watch
4 We ..... at the party half an hour ago if wed left a bit earlier.
A could have been
B could be
C were
5 If you ..... Chinese, would you go and spend some time in China?
A would study
B would have studied
C were studying
6 If I ..... tomorrow, Ill meet you for lunch.
A worked
B am working
C would work
7 If you were living abroad, what ..... the most about your country?
A would you miss
B will you miss
C would you have missed
UNIT 8 Conditionals Exercise 10

Conditionals: error correction
Correct sentences. Find and correct one word in the incorrect sentences.
1. If you have taken more time over your composition, you would have got a better mark.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
2. If you had drank more slowly, you wouldnt have got hiccups.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
3. Would you be offended if I offered you some advice?
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
4. If we had finished dinner earlier, we can have gone to the cinema.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
5. Butter melts if you heat it.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
6. If I am you, I would try and have a few hours rest before the journey.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
37
UNIT 9 Exercise 1
regret (doing), regret (to do)
Write the correct form of the verb regret and the verb in brackets to complete the sentences.
1. Wendy now --------- to university. (not go)
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
2. We --------- you that your application has not been successful. (inform)
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
3. Do you ever --------- to the city? (move)
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
4. Sam doesnt --------- the job. It was starting to get boring. (leave)
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
5. I--------- that I wont be able to come to your party. (say)
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
6. We --------- the delay to flight SK 198 to Perth. (announce)
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
UNIT 9 Exercise 2
Expressing wishes about the past

Rewrite the sentences.
Write the correct form of the verb wish and the words in brackets. More than one answer may be possible.
1. Colin said the wrong thing at the meeting.

(prepare more carefully)
He _________________________________________________________________________________________.
2. The twins bought the same style of jeans.
(be a bit more adventurous)
They _________________________________________________________________________________________.
3. We didnt ring Julie to say that wed be late!
(think about it)
I _________________________________________________________________________________________.
4. I shouldnt have eaten so much at the party!
(be so greedy)
I _________________________________________________________________________________________.
5. My car is always breaking down.
(never buy it)
I _________________________________________________________________________________________.
6. I had a terrible journey home on the motorway last night.
(take the train)
I _________________________________________________________________________________________.
7. I forgot to send my aunt a birthday card.
(remember to do it)
I _________________________________________________________________________________________.
38
UNIT 9 Exercise 3
Expressing wishes about the present and the future
Write wishes about the present or the future to complete the sentences. Write between 24 words. More than one answer
may be possible.
1. William cant stop eating chocolate!

He wishes he ------- it.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
2. My friends are always sending me text messages.
I wish they ------- so many messages.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
3. I never seem to have any time for myself.
I wish I ------- more time for myself.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
4. My son never tidies his room!
I wish he ------- it from time to time.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
5. Sarah wants to be taller. She wishes she ------- a bit taller.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
6. Brenda talks too much! I wish she ------- so much.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
7. The rain in this country really gets me down.
I wish it ------ so wet.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
8. We never seem to go out anywhere these days.
I wish we ------- out more often.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
UNIT 9 Exercise 4
Wishes and regrets: error correction
Tick the correct sentences. Find the error in the incorrect sentences and Write the correct word or missing word.
1. I regretting to say that I am unable to attend the conference next weekend.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
2. If only I would speak English perfectly.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
3. I wish I liked Mary, but I dont.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
4. I wish Greg would telling me when he is going to be late.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
5. If only I did remembered to give my sister the telephone message yesterday.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
6. Philip wishes he lives in a nicer house.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
7. We wish we would afford to move out of the city.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
39
UNIT 9 Exercise 5
Wishes and regrets: past, present and future
For questions 16, complete the second sentence so that it has a similar meaning to the first sentence, using the word
given. Do not change the word given.
You must use between 35 words, including the word given.
1. I regret ending my relationship with Bob.

UP: I wish I --- with Bob.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
2. Im sorry now that I had an argument with my best friend.
OUT: I regret --- my best friend.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
3. I should have applied for that job in the travel agency.
IN: If only I --- for that job in the travel agency.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
4. I hate it when David makes people feel stupid for no reason.
DOWN: I wish David --- for no reason.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
5. Its a shame you persuaded me not to go and see that film.
OFF: I wish you --- going to see that film.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
6. We wanted to spend the summer in Spain, but at the last minute we couldnt go.
THROUGH: I wish our plans --- to spend the summer in Spain at the last minute.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
UNIT 9 Exercise 6
I wish and If only
Write the correct form of the verb in brackets to complete the sentences.
1. If only you ------- me what you were going to do before you did it! (tell)
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
2. I wish you ------- to me like that all the time! (not talk)
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
3. If only we ------- win the lottery one day! (can)
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
4. I wish I ------- rich and famous! (be)
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
5. If only we ------- to get up so early tomorrow morning! (not have)
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
6. I wish the children ------- on the ride with us this afternoon. (come)
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
40
UNIT 9 Exercise 7
Infinitive or ing form?
Write the correct form of remember, stop or try, and the verb in brackets to complete the sentences.
1. I dont ------- a letter about the conference, but I might have forgotten. (get)
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
2. I ------- what the note said, but I couldnt read the writing. (make out)
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
3. Please ------- about the restaurant it wasnt my idea to come here. (complain)
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
4. I ------- with lots of garlic, but the children dont like the taste. (cook)
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
5. I hope you ------- some stamps for me. You usually forget! (buy)
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
6. I got lost while I was driving to the station, so I ------- someone for directions. (ask)
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
7. I ------- long school holidays when I was a child. (have)
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
8. If you ------- for a minute, Ill tell you what happened to me on the way back from school. (talk)
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
41
GRAMMAR EXERCISES UNIT10
UNIT 10 Exercise 1
before, after, when, while + -ing
Complete the sentences.
Write before, after, when or while + the -ing form of these verbs. More than one answer may be possible.
leave arrive cross travel finish book
1. ------- our exams, we celebrated by going to the cinema.
2. ------- to Russia, we had to get a visa.
3. Soon ------- at the airport, we discovered that all the planes had been grounded.
4. ------- the desert, the truck broke down.
5. I always have toast for breakfast -------home in the morning.
6. ------- your flight, make sure you ask about the baggage allowance.
Grammar Exercise 2
Passive forms
Complete the second sentence with a passive form. Dont mention by and the agent in the passive sentence.
Write between 24 words.
1 They need more time to finish the work.

More time -------to finish the work.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
2 They had to send the letter by airmail.
The letter -------by airmail.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
3 Someone will repair the car tomorrow.
The car ------ tomorrow.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
4 They have built a new block of flats in Fulton Street.
A new block of flats ------- in Fulton Street.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
5 Someone stole my bike yesterday!
My bike ------ yesterday!
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
6 They ought to send emergency supplies to the disaster area.
Emergency supplies -------to the disaster area.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
42
Grammar Exercise 3
Relative clauses and relative pronouns: error correction
Write the correct sentences. Find a word that is incorrect in the other sentences. Write the correct word.
1. My new boss, which I introduced you to yesterday, is a really nice person.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
2. Is this the article who you were talking about?
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
3. Who is the woman which I saw you talking to in the corridor?
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
4. Is this the place when you were born?
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
5. London, which lies on the river Thames, is the capital of England.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
6. The race to who I referred is held every winter.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
7. This is the car what I bought yesterday.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
8. The Oscar-winning actor, whose face is familiar to everybody, has no intention of retiring.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
9. Was it Edison whom invented the light bulb?
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
10. Athens, what is a large city, is the capital of Greece.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
UNIT 10 Exercise 4
Defining relative clauses
Choose the correct defining relative clause to complete each sentence.
Use each relative clause only once. There is one extra relative clause you do not need.
who looked after me, we caught, i lost, whose parents, that i rented, where i was educated, when we arrived,
who knocked at the door, we ordered
1. The plane ------ arrived two hours late.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
2. Could you send the goods ------ by recorded delivery?
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
3. The nurse ------ was Australian.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
43
4. The car ------ broke down on the way to the hotel.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
5. The man ------ came to read the gas meter.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
6. Is this the child ------ are millionaires?
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
7. This is the school ------ .
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
8. The watch ------ was found in the cloakroom.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
UNIT 10 Exercise 5
Defining relative clauses
Combine the sentences to make one sentence with a defining relative clause.
Make any other necessary changes. More than one answer may be possible.
1. Theres the museum. I did a project there last year.

Theres the museum ------ a project last year.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
2. Sams the new teacher. Hes taking our class this year.
Sams the new teacher ------ our class this year.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
3. The picture was painted by Monet. It is hanging over there.
The picture ------ is hanging over there.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
4. Teds that famous writer. His latest book won an award.
Teds the famous writer ------ won an award.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
5. I saw the film yesterday. Its a horror story.
The film ------ is a horror story.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
6. The race takes place in the mountains. Its a major tourist attraction.
The race ------ is a major tourist attraction.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
44
UNIT 10 Exercise 6
Defining relative clauses: omitting the pronoun
Tick the sentences where the relative pronoun can be left out.
Write a suitable relative pronoun to complete the sentences where the relative pronoun cannot be left out.
1. Is this the restaurant you went to last week?
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
2. People are laid back are usually easy to get on with.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
3. Are these the students exam results were so good?
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
4. The girl I was talking to is my best friend.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
5. I wasnt talking about that shop I meant the one is on the corner of the street.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
6. The songs the German composer wrote are still popular today.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
7. I have a friend writes beautiful poetry.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
8. Thats the cinema they sell half-price tickets on Thursday nights.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
9. I really enjoyed the book you gave me for Christmas.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
10. July is a month a lot of our staff go on holiday.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
11. The author writes books I cant put down.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
12. I enjoy going to restaurants the atmosphere is friendly.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
13. Is this the dictionary you were looking for?
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
45
Grammar Exercise 7
Non-defining relative clauses

Complete the non-defining clauses in the sentences using the verbs below and a suitable relative pronoun.
is are covered painted was elected you can do runs
1. The river, ------ through the city, is beautiful.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
2. Picasso, ------ Guernica, was a famous artist.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
3. Taking video clips, ------ on a mobile phone, is very popular nowadays.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
4. The palace, ------ beautifully decorated, is worth visiting.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
5. The President, ------ last year, is travelling to Geneva tomorrow.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
6. The mountains, ------ in snow from November to April, are very popular with skiers.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
UNIT 10 Exercise 8
Non-defining relative clauses
Complete the second sentence so that it means the same as the first, using a relative pronoun.
1. Those mountains are called the Pyrenees. They divide France and Spain.
Those mountains, ------ , divide France and Spain.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
2. The tide comes in twice a day. It is particularly low in the summer.
The tide, ------ , comes in twice a day.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
3. This shop is owned by a man called Harper. It sells quality goods.
This shop, ____ , is owned by a man called Harper.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
4. The film was shot in Spain. It became an overnight success.
The film, ------ , became an overnight success.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
5. Maria became a successful actress. Her father was a writer.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
46
GRAMMAR
REFERENCE
47
48
GRAMMAR REFERENCE UNIT 1
REPORTING QUESTIONS
A. When we report a question, we use verbs such as ask, enquire, need to find out, want to know, wonder.
1. We can report a wh-question.
'When is the lecture?' Someone wants to know when the lecture is.
'How much is a ticket?' James enquired how much a ticket was.
'Where did you eat?' I asked Elaine where she'd eaten.
'Who have you invited?' Peter is wondering who we've invited.
'What size do you take?'The assistant asked me what size I took.
2. To report a yes/no question, we use if/whether.
'Is the drug safe?' People are asking if/whether the drug is safe.
'Has the car been repaired?' He wants to know if/whether the car has been repaired.
After if/whether we can use or not to stress the need for a yes/no answer.
We need to find out if/whether the drug is safe or not.
We need to find out whether or not the drug is safe.
B. In an indirect question the word order is usually subject + verb, as in a statement.
I'll ask when the bus leaves.
(Compare: The bus leaves at three ten. ) NOT I'll ask when does the bus leave.
But we can use inversion when the reporting verb comes at the end, as a kind of afterthought.
When does the bus leave, I wonder.
C. In an indirect question the tense can change from present to past in the same way as in a statement.
'What do you want?' 'Can we take photos?'
The man asked what we wanted.
Anna wondered if we could take photos.
D. We can use an indirect question form after say, tell, etc when we are talking about the answer to a question.
Did Zoe say when she would call? I haven't been informed what time the flight gets in.
I wish you'd tell me whether you agree.
TIP: You can use an indirect question when you approach someone to ask politely for information. Could you tell me where
the lift is, please? is more polite than just asking Where is the lift?
MODAL VERBS
A The modal verbs are can, could, must, should, ought, may, might, will, would, and shall. They express ideas such as
ability, necessity, and possibility. A modal verb always has the same form and never has an ending such as -s, -ing, or -ed.
B After a modal verb we put an infinitive without to.
We can park here. I must go now.
The only exception is ought.
I ought to go now.
The infinitive can also be perfect, continuous, or passive.
I may have shown you this before. We may be shown the results later.
They may be showing the film soon.
C. To form the negative we use not or n't with the modal verb.
It might not work. We shouldn't laugh.
In questions we put the modal verb before the subject.
Can we park here? NOT Do we can park here?
D. The verbs need and dare can be used either as modal verbs or as ordinary verbs.
You needn't go. / You don't need to go.
49
MODALS
Here are some meanings expressed by modal verbs.

Use Example
Necessity You must be careful.
No necessity We needn't hurry there's plenty of time.
The right thing to do You should revise / You ought to revise before the exam.
Permission Can/May I ask you a personal question?
We couldn't look round without a guide.
Certainty You must be tired after that long walk.
You can't be tired already.
Possibility I'm not sure, but I may/might go out later.
We could go out later if you like.
Ability Joshua can walk on his hands.
No one could hit the target.
Hypothesis A million pounds would be very useful to me now.
DON'T HAVE TO, NEEDN'T, AND MUSTN'T
A. Don't have to and needn't

We use don't have to and needn't when we say that something is not necessary.
You don't have to apologize. It's not your fault.
You needn't apologize. It's not your fault.
Don't have to is more usual than needn't.
B. Need to
There is an ordinary verb need, which we can use in positive and negative sentences and in questions. Need to means
the same as have to. To form negatives and questions we use do.
have to
The colours have to match. Do we have to book in advance?
The figure doesn't have to be exact.
need to (ordinary verb)
The colours need to match. Do we need to book in advance?
The figure doesn't need to be exact.
needn't (modal verb)
The figure needn't be exact. BUT NOT The colours need match
The modal verb needn't is normally used only in the negative.
C. Didn't need to do and needn't have done
We use didn't need to for an action that didn't happen because it wasn't necessary.
It was a lovely day. I didn't need to take my umbrella, so I left it at home.
If something happened which we now see was unnecessary, we can use either form.
I needn't have brought / didn't need to bring this umbrella with me, but I didn't realize it would be such a lovely day.
D. Mustn't
We use mustn't to tell someone not to do something or to avoid something.
You mustn't forget your keys.
We mustn't lose this game.
50
Mustn't or may not can be used to forbid something.
Students must not / may not use dictionaries in the exam.
TIP: Mustn't has a different meaning from don't have to / needn't. Use mustn't for a necessity not to do something.
Use don't have to or needn't when there is no necessity.
I mustn't run. I've got a weak heart.
I don't have to / I needn't run. I've got plenty of time.
PHRASAL AND PREPOSITIONAL VERBS
A. A phrasal verb is a verb + adverb.

Come in and sit down.
I took off my shoes.
A prepositional verb is a verb + preposition.
I was looking at the photo.
We didn't go into all the details.
The preposition has an object (the photo, the details).
Some phrasal verbs have no object.
Suddenly the lights went out.
Others have an object.
Someone turned out the lights.
B. When a phrasal verb has an object, both these orders are usually possible.
We woke up the neighbours.
We woke the neighbours up.
C. The adverb (up) can go before or after the object (the neighbours).
When the object is a pronoun, the adverb goes after it.
The neighbours were annoyed because we woke them up.
When the object is a long phrase, the adverb usually goes before it.
We woke up just about everybody in the whole street.
The adverb can sometimes go in front position for extra emphasis.
The door opened, and out ran the boys.
There is usually inversion of subject and verb, unless the subject is a pronoun.
The door opened, and out they ran.
D. A prepositional verb always has an object after the preposition.
Lisa paid for the meal.
Lisa paid for it.
Compare these examples.
She looked at it. ( prepositional verb stress on looked )
She put it away. ( phrasal verb stress on away )
E. An adverbial usually goes after the phrasal verb but between a verb and preposition.
The plane took off on time.
I looked carefully at the photo.
F. Many phrasal and prepositional verbs can be passive.
The alarm has been switched off.
The matter will be dealt with.
TIP
Some verb + adverb combinations can be used as a noun, e.g. a handout for each student, a hold-up at the bank, a car
breakdown, an hour before take-off.
51
QUESTION TAGS
A question tag refers back to the subject and auxiliary of the main clause.
Subject Auxiliary Tag
Paul was joking,wasn't he?
A negative tag is auxiliary + n't + pronoun (wasn't he?).
A positive tag is like a negative one, but without n't.
Paul wasn't joking, was he?
In simple tenses we use the auxiliary do.
You came home early, didn't you?
We can use be as an ordinary verb.
That wasn't very clever, was it?
After I am, the tag is aren't I?
I'm late, aren't I?
A. More about pronouns
We can use the subject there in a tag.
There's lots to do, isn't there?
After this/that or -thing, we use it.
That's right, isn't it?
NOT ... isn't that?
Something went wrong, didn't it?
After these/those or -one/-body, we use they.
These CDs are cheap, aren't they?
Anybody could just walk in, couldn't they?
B. Positive and negative
The usual patterns are these:
positive statement + negative tag
negative statement + positive tag.
These tags ask the hearer to agree that the statement is true. A tag is usually an invitation to continue the
conversation.
It's cold, isn't it?
It isn't very warm, is it?
The intonation falls on the tag because the statement is clearly true. But the voice can rise on the tag when the
sentence is like a question.
You've got the tickets, haven't you?
We can use this rising intonation in a question or request.
You couldn't lend me 10, could you?
C. Positive statement + positive tag
This pattern has a different meaning from the examples above.
I've got no time at the moment. ~ You're busy, are you?
Vicky doesn't live here any more. ~ Oh, she's moved, has she?
This means that I realize from what you say that she has moved, and I want you to confirm this and continue the
conversation.
TIP
Tags are useful when you are making friendly remarks, e.g. about the weather.
52
THE PRESENT SIMPLE
Form
A. The present simple is the base form of a verb, e.g. know, take.
You know the answer.
I usually take the bus.
The third person singular has -s or -es.
Tom knows the answer.
This colour matches my jacket.
B. In the negative we use do not or don't + base form.
I just do not know the answer.
The instructions don't make sense.
C. In the third person singular we use does not or doesn't + base form.
Tom does not know the answer.
The journey doesn't take long.
NOT ... no takes long.
AND NOT ... doesn't takes long.
D. In questions we use do + base form.
Do you know the answer?
What do the instructions say?
E. In the third person singular we use does.
Does Tom know the answer?
How long does the journey take?
NOT How long takes the journey?
We do not use do with be but we sometimes use it with have .
Basic uses
F. We use the present simple for a present state, e.g. a feeling, an opinion, or the fact that something belongs to
someone.
My lfriend likes hiphop.
Do you think it's a good idea?
This MP3 player belongs to my brother.
We also use the present simple for facts such as what or where things are.
Silicon is a chemical element.
York lies on the River Ouse.
G. We also use the present simple for repeated actions such as routines, habits, jobs, hobbies, and things that
always happen.
The old man walks his dogs every day.
I work in Oxford. I usually drive to work.
We play volleyball on Wednesdays.
I don't see my cousins very often.
Typical time expressions with the present simple are always, often, usually, sometimes,ever/never; every day/week,
etc; once/twice a week, etc; on Friday(s), etc; in the morning(s)/evening(s), at ten o'clock, etc.
TIP
Use the present simple to make generalizations, e.g. The British don't like living in flats, and to make scientific
statements, e.g. Food gives you energy.
53
THE PRESENT CONTINUOUS
Form
A. The present continuous is the present of be + ing-form.

I'm writing an e-mail.
Those people are waiting for a taxi.
It's raining now, look.
B. In the negative we use not or n't after be.
I'm not making a noise.
They aren't playing /They're not playing very well.
It isn't raining. / It's not raining.
C. In questions we put be before the subject.
Am I doing it right?
Is it still raining?
Where are you calling from?
Use
D. We use the present continuous for a present action over a period of time, something that we are in the middle
of now. The action has started, but it hasn't finished yet.
Someone is following us.
What are you doing? ~ I'm thinking.
It's a lovely day, and we're all sitting in the garden.
Some typical time expressions with the present continuous are now, at the moment, at present, just, already, and still.
The train is leaving Victoria now.
We're having tea at the moment.
I won't be long. I'm just ironing this shirt.
The customer is still waiting to be served.
The action does not need to be going on at the moment of speaking.
I'm reading an interesting book at the moment. ( I do not have the book in my hands. )
Is anyone sitting here? ~ No, it's free. ( asking permission to take a seat )
The important thing is that the action has started but not finished.
E. We also use the present continuous for a temporary routine, something that will last only a short time.
We've got builders at the office, so I'm working at home this week.
They're living in a rented flat until they find somewhere to buy.
Typical time expressions are this week, these days, nowadays, at/for the moment, at present, and still.
TIP
We use the present continuous to talk about things that are developing or changing over a long period, e.g. The earth is
getting warmer.
54
PRESENT SIMPLE OR PRESENT CONTINUOUS?
A. The basic difference

We use the present simple for a permanent routine, a state, or a fact.
We eat in the canteen most days.
Paul loves burgers.
Two and two makes four.
We use the present continuous for something we are in the middle of.
I'm eating a burger at the moment.
These forms can refer to the future.
B. Routines
We use the simple for a permanent routine and the continuous for a temporary routine.
I usually travel to work by car, but it's off the road. I'm travelling by bus this week.
C. Always
Always with the continuous means very often'. It sometimes expresses annoyance.
I'm always losing things.
Compare these sentences.
We always have a test. ( every lesson )
We're always having tests. ( very often )
D. States
We use the present simple for a state.
We need more money.
Some verbs can be either simple or continuous.
The weather looks / is looking nice.
E. Present actions
The present simple can be used to describe actions as they happen.
He shoots! And it's a goal!
I add the sauce and stir gently.
Past actions
We can use the present tense for past events to make a story come to life.
I'm standing there, and a man comes up to me and grabs me by the arm
We can also use the present to explain the plot of a story.
Macbeth murders the King of Scotland, who is staying at his castle.
F. The written word
We use the present simple to report the written word.
It says in the paper the game is today.
The letter explains everything.
We can also use it for what someone has said recently.
Laura says she doesn't feel well.
TIP
Use the present simple in instructions and explanations, e.g. You pull down the File menu and choose Print.
55
INTRODUCTION TO ADVERBIALS
Adverbials add more details to a sentence. They tell us how, when, or where something happened.
Slowly the bus drove past.
We have now been waiting an hour.
I'm travelling around the world.
Often an adverbial is an extra element that could be left out of a sentence.
At last we were off.
OR
We were off.
But sometimes it is necessary to complete the sentence.
Rick's been to the match.
The next performance is tomorrow.
An adverbial can be a simple adverb (e.g. there, carefully).
No one lives there.
I wrapped all the glasses carefully.
We can put an adverb of degree (e.g. very) in front of the adverb.
The time passed very quickly.
An adverbial can also be a prepositional phrase (e.g. to the park).
We walked to the park.
The queue went round the block.
In a strange way, I don't mind failing.
We can use a noun phrase (e.g. last week), but this is less frequent.
I saw a great film last week.
An adverbial can usually go in more than one place in a sentence.
Naturally we were expecting a call.
We were naturally expecting a call.
We were expecting a call, naturally.
These places are front position, mid position, and end position.
The best position for an adverbial may depend on what Write it is (e.g. manner or time), or on its length. A long phrase
goes better at the beginning or end.
I can't express it in simple words.
NOT I can't in simple words express it.
Sometimes we put an adverbial in front position to link with the previous sentence.
I waited for ages. In the end I gave up and went home.
An adverbial can also follow a noun that it modifies.

The car in front braked suddenly.
The rain yesterday spoilt our picnic.
TIP
When there are two clauses, the position of the adverbial can affect the meaning. Compare:
We agreed immediately that I would leave. ( an immediate agreement )
We agreed that I would leave immediately. ( an immediate departure )
56
THE INFINITIVE
A. An infinitive can be with to or without to.

I'd prefer to sit at the back.
I'd rather sit at the back.
Whether we use to depends on the grammatical pattern. For example, we use it after prefer but not after would rather.
The most common use of an infinitive without to is after a modal verb.
I can sit at the back.
B. A to-infinitive can have these forms.
Simple: to do
It's great to see you.
Perfect: to have done
I seem to have left my umbrella behind.
Continuous: to be doing
You're lucky to be living here.
Perfect + continuous: to have been doing
A man at the bus stop appeared to have been drinking.
In the negative, not comes before the infinitive.
I'd prefer not to sit at the front.
It would have been too risky not to have had medical insurance.
C. An infinitive can be followed by an object or complement and/or by one or more adverbials. The infinitive
together with such phrases is an infinitive clause.
A sightseeing tour is the best way to see the city. ( infinitive + object )
I'm doing my best to keep fit. ( infinitive + complement )
I'd be quite happy to sit at the back. ( infinitive + adverbial )
Or an infinitive clause can be just an infinitive on its own.
We decided to leave.
D. In an infinitive clause, a preposition comes in its normal place, often after a verb or adjective.
It isn't enough money to live on.
There's nothing to get excited about.
I need a vase to put these flowers in.
In more formal English the clause can begin with a preposition and relative pronoun.
It is not enough money on which to live.
TIP
A one-word adverbial can often go after to and before the verb, e.g. Now we've got a chance to really relax. This is called
a 'split infinitive'. A few people think it is incorrect, but in fact it is common usage.
57
USED TO AND DARE
A
Used to
Used to means that something happened regularly or continued for a time in the past but no longer does so.
I used to come here when I was a child.
Emma used to have a bicycle, but then she sold it.
There is no present-tense form.
NOT I use to come here now.
We use did in negatives and questions.
There didn't use to be so much crime.
What did people use to do before they had television?
We can also use never for the negative.
There never used to be so much crime.
B
Used to and be/get used to
Compare these patterns.
We used to live in the country before we moved to London.
It was strange at first, but we're used to living here now.
Used to do refers to the past, and be used to doing means that something no longer feels strange.
Get used to refers to something becoming more familiar.
If you go to live in France, you'll have to get used to driving on the right.
C
Would for past habits
In literary English, would can be used to talk about past habits.
Every day my father would leave / used to leave the house before I was awake.
With states only used to is possible.
We used to own a motorboat.
D
Dare
Dare can be a modal verb or an ordinary verb, and it takes an infinitive with or without to.
Few people dare (to) go out at night.
No one dares (to) protest / dare protest.
Who would dare (to) resist?
One man had dared (to) take the risk.
If you dare, you are brave enough, and if you daren't, then you are afraid.
Dare is more common in negatives and questions. The negative forms are don't/doesn't/didn't dare or daren't / dare
not (present) and dared not (past).
I don't dare look / daren't look at the bill.
The police didn't dare to approach / dared not approach the building.
Questions also have different forms.
Do you dare to try? / Dare you try?
TIP
The s in used is pronounced z in e.g. I used my key and s in e.g. I used to go fishing or I'm used to the noise.
58
THE PAST SIMPLE
Form
A
With most verbs we add -ed to form the past simple.
We finished our meal and walked home.
They played football on Tuesday.
The form is the same in all persons.
Some past forms are irregular.
When they saw the fire, they ran away.
B
In the negative we use did not or didn't + base form.
We didn't finish our meal.
They didn't run away.
NOT They no ran away.
AND NOT They didn't ran away.
In questions we use did + base form.
Did they finish their meal?
How fast did they run?
NOT How fast ran they?
C
Both regular and irregular verbs are the same in all persons. The one exception is the verb be.
I was / You were late this morning.
We do not use did with was or were.
I wasn't hungry at lunch.
Were you tired last night?
NOT Did you be tired last night?
Use
D
We use the past simple for an action in the past.
I bought this coat yesterday.
I saw the film three weeks ago.
The war ended in 1945.
When did the train arrive?
The time of the action (yesterday, three weeks ago) is over.
The past is the normal tense in stories.
A princess once walked into a wood and sat down by a stream
E
The past simple can also refer to a series of actions in the past.
I often visited this place as a child.
He went to the Job Centre several times.
We also use the past simple for states.
That party last week was great.
The Romans had a huge empire.
I believed in fairies when I was little.
TIP
Some typical time expressions with the past simple are yesterday, last week/year, a week/month ago, the other
day/week, at ten o'clock, on Monday, in 2001, once, then, next, after that.
59
THE PAST CONTINUOUS
A
Form
The past continuous is the past of be + ing-form.
It was getting dark.
People were going home from work.
My mobile wasn't working.
What were you thinking about?
B
Basic uses
We use the past continuous to express the idea that at a time in the past we were in the middle of something.
At 3 a.m. I was lying there wide awake.
The pub was full of people who were all watching football on a big screen.
We stood there horrified. Water was pouring through a hole in the ceiling.
Compare the present continuous and past continuous.
I'm travelling around the world. ( I am in the middle of my journey. )
I was travelling around the world. ( I was in the middle of my journey. )
We sometimes use the past continuous for an action going on over a whole period.
The builders were working all night.
We could also use the past simple (worked) here.
C
Past continuous and simple
An action in the past continuous can happen around a time or around another action.
It was raining at ten o'clock.
It was raining when I left.
The past continuous is the longer action (the rain falling), and the past simple is the shorter, complete action (my
leaving). The shorter action interrupts' the longer one.
I was washing my hair when you rang.
While we were waiting, a man came in.
But when one complete action followed another, we use the past simple for both.
The bell rang, and Tim went to the door.
D
Past states
For a past state we normally use the simple.
The woman had long dark hair.
My grandmother loved this house.
NOT She was loving this house.
Some verbs can be either simple or continuous for a temporary state.
The men wore / were wearing masks.
TIP
Use the past simple for the main action and the continuous for the background, e.g. The sun was shining.
We walked along the beach. People were lying in the sun. Children were playing.
60
WILL AND SHALL
A Form
After will we use an infinitive without to. Will and will not have short forms 'll and won't.
This book will change your life.
We'll know the results soon.
You won't get another chance.
Will you be in tomorrow?
After I or we, either will or shall can be used. Shall is a little formal.
I will be / I shall be at home tomorrow.
B Will for the future
Will often refers to things in the future that we can be fairly sure about.
The South will stay dry at the weekend.
I'll be 25 next year.
Will does not express a wish or intention.
We can also use will with have to, be allowed to, and be able to.
We're late. We'll have to hurry.
C An instant decision
We can sometimes use I'll / We'll for an instant decision.
It's raining. I'll take an umbrella.
Compare will and be going to.
What do I need? Oh, I'll buy a paper. ( I'm deciding now to buy one. )
I'm going to buy a paper. I won't be long. ( I've already decided to buy one. )
D Willingness
Will sometimes expresses willingness.
My Polish friend will translate it for you.
I'll sit / I'm willing to sit on the floor.
Won't or will not can express unwillingness or an emphatic refusal to do something.
The minister will not agree to the plan.
I won't listen to this nonsense.
E Other uses of will
We use will for offers and promises.
I'll hold the door open for you.
(I promise) I'll do my best to help you.
F Shall I/we or Will I/we ...?
We use shall I/we to make an offer, or to ask for advice or suggestions.
Shall I carry that for you? ~ Oh, thanks.
Where shall I put these flowers?
What shall we do this weekend?
But we use will I/we for the future.
Will I need a visa?
When will we get our results?
We can use shall we for a suggestion.
Shall we go / Let's go out somewhere?
TIPDo not confuse will and want. Compare I'll sit down on this seat (a decision) with I want to sit down, but there aren't
any seats (a wish).
61
BE GOING TO
A Form
The form is be going to + verb.
I'm going to watch television.
It isn't going to rain, is it?
Are you going to buy a ticket?
B Be going to for the future
We can use be going to for something in the future.
It's going to be fine next week.
I think United are going to win.
My father is probably going to be in hospital for at least two weeks.
Will is also possible in these examples.
Be going to has a sense of something in the present pointing to the future.
It's ten already. We're going to be late.
This wall is going to fall down soon.
We can see from the time now that we are going to be late, and we can see from the condition of the wall now that it is
going to fall down.
C Intentions
We can use be going to for a plan or an intention.
They're going to build a house here.
I'm going to start my own business.
This means that I intend to start / I have decided to start it.
With verbs of movement, especially go and come, we often use the present continuous rather than be going to.
I'm going out in a minute.
Of course we're coming to your party.
D Was going to
We can use was/were going to for a prediction or an intention in the past.
I knew there was going to be trouble.
I was going to do some shopping, so I took my credit card with me.
This means that I intended to do some shopping.
Sometimes the intended action does not actually happen.
The bus pulled away just as we were going to get on it.
We did not get on the bus because it pulled away too soon.
Sometimes we can also use would for a past prediction.
I knew there would be trouble.
I thought that question would come up in the exam.
TIP
Was going to is useful when you are explaining that you meant to do something but didn't actually do it, e.g. I'm sorry. I
was going to finish the report, but I really didn't have time.
62
PRESENT TENSES FOR THE FUTURE
A The present continuous

We use the present continuous for what someone has arranged to do.
I'm meeting Kate at the club tonight.
What are you doing tomorrow?
Julie is going to Florida next month.
This suggests that Julie has made arrangements such as buying her ticket.
The meaning is similar to be going to for an intention. We can often use either form.
We're visiting / We're going to visit friends at the weekend.
B The present simple
We can sometimes use the present simple for the future when we are talking about a timetable.
The meeting is on May 13.
The train leaves in five minutes.
What time do you arrive in New York?
We do not use the present simple for decisions or intentions.
I'll carry that for you.
NOT I carry that for you.
They're going to build a road through here soon.
NOT They build a road through here soon.
C The present tense in a sub-clause
We often use the present simple for future time in a clause with if, when, as, while, before,after, until, by the time,
or as soon as. This happens when both clauses are about the future.
If we meet at seven, we'll be in time.
My dad is going to retire when he's sixty.
Let's wait until the rain stops.
Call me as soon as you have any news.
NOT ... as soon as you'll have any news.
The same thing happens in a relative clause or noun clause.
There will be a prize for the person who scores the most points.
Make sure everything is left tidy, will you?
We also use the present, and not will, with the continuous and the perfect.
I'll relax when I'm lying by the pool.
NOT ... when I'll be lying by the pool.
Let's carry on until we've finished.
NOT ... until we'll have finished.
TIP
If the main clause has a present-tense verb such as I expect, then we do not use another present-tense verb for the
future. We say I expect the rain will stop soon, not I expect the rain stops soon.
63
WILL, BE GOING TO, OR THE PRESENT TENSE?
A
There is no single future tense' in English. There are a number of different forms we can use for the future,
e.g. will and be going to. There is often more than one possible form in a particular context.
B
We use both will and be going to for the future.
It'll probably rain at the weekend.
Look at those clouds. It's going to rain.
The prediction with be going to is based on the present situation.
We use be going to (not will) when the future action seems certain to happen and is very close.
Help! I'm going to fall!
I'm going to be sick!
Sometimes we can use either form.
I won't be / I'm not going to be late.
One day the sun will cool down / the sun is going to cool down.
C When we talk about intentions, plans, and arrangements, we use be going to or the present continuous, but not will.
We're going to eat out tonight. ( We intend to eat out. )
We're eating out tonight. ( We have arranged to eat out. )
Will has a different meaning.
I don't feel like cooking tonight. ~ Well, we 'll eat out then.
Here will expresses an instant decision rather than an existing intention.
We use the present simple for a timetable but not for an intention or arrangement.
The play starts at seven thirty.
BUT NOT I act in a play next week.
D We do not use will to first mention a plan, but we often use it for further details and comments.
I'm going on holiday on Saturday. I'll be away for three weeks.
We're going to do some walking. ~ Oh, that'll be nice.
They're going to lay a new path. The work will take a couple of days.
Note that we do not use the ordinary verb be in the present continuous.
I'll be away for three weeks.
NOT I'm being away for three weeks.
TIP
Don't automatically use will for the future. Remember that be going to can be used for both predictions and intentions,
so it is often the safest choice, especially in conversation.
64
THE FUTURE CONTINUOUS AND PERFECT
A Future continuous
The form is will be + ing-form.
I'll be working all day tomorrow.
We won't be doing much on Sunday.
Will you be staying here long?
We use the future continuous for an action that we will be in the middle of.
In a week's time I'll be lying in the sun.
We'll be having tea at seven.
We sometimes use it for an action over a whole future period.
Sarah will be revising all evening.
We also use the future continuous for an action which will result from a routine or arrangement.
I'll be phoning my mother tonight. ( It's part of my regular routine. )
The Queen will be arriving soon. ( It's part of her schedule. )
Other forms are possible in this context.
I'm going to phone / I 'm phoning tonight.
B Future perfect
The form is will have + past participle.
We'll have done half the job soon.
I won't have got home by six.
How long will the casserole have been in the oven?
We use the future perfect to talk about something being over in the future.
I'll have finished this book soon. I'm nearly at the end.
Gemma won't have completed her studies until she's 25.
C Future perfect continuous

The form is will have been + ing-form.
Mike is leaving next month. He'll have been working here ten years.
Our neighbours are moving. They won't have been living here long.
How long will the spaceship have been orbiting the earth?
We use this form when we imagine looking back from the future. In the first example, we look back from next month at
Mike's work continuing up to that time.
The future perfect focuses on the result of an action.
I'll have written the report by six.
The future perfect continuous focuses on the action going on.
I'll have been writing it for a week.
TIP
You can use the future continuous to ask about someone's plans and see if they fit in with your wishes, e.g. How long
will you be using the tennis court?
65
BE TO, BE ABOUT TO, ETC
A Be to for an arrangement
We can use be + to-infinitive for an official arrangement.
The Prime Minister is to visit Rome.
The two companies are to merge shortly.
Be is often left out in news headlines.
Prime Minister to visit Rome.
B Be to for an order
Be to can also express a rule or an order by a person in authority.
The teacher says we are to wait here.
You're not to stay up late.
No one is to leave this building.
C Be about to and be on the point of

We use be about to for the near future.
The performance is about to start.
Hurry up. The bus is about to leave.
We can use just with be about to and be going to for the very near future.
The bus is just about to leave / is just going to leave.
Be on the point of means the same as be about to. It is followed by an ing-form.
I'm on the point of quitting my job.
There is no time with these phrases.
NOT We're about to leave in ten minutes.
D Be due to
We can sometimes use be due + to-infinitive to talk about a timetable.
The meeting is due to take place today.
The train is due to leave at four twenty.
E Be set to
Be set + to-infinitive is used in news reports for things expected to happen soon.
The player is set to leave the club.
Prices are set to rise once more.
F Be bound/sure/certain to
We use these forms to say what will definitely happen in the future.
There's bound to be trouble.
The president is sure/certain to resign.
G Was to, was about to, etc

We can use the forms in the past tense.
Daniel fell ill on the day he was to go for a job interview.
We saw that the bus was about to leave.
We were on the point of buying the flat when we had second thoughts.
TIP
It is more important to recognize these forms than to use them. You can express most of the meanings differently,
e.g. They have arranged to meet. We're going to leave in a moment. There will definitely be trouble.
66
SHOULD, OUGHT TO, HAD BETTER, AND BE SUPPOSED TO
A
We use should and ought to when we say what is the right thing or the best thing to do.
We should recycle / We ought to recycle as much as possible.
You should see / You ought to see the film. You'll love it.
In negatives and questions we normally use should.
People shouldn't leave litter everywhere.
Who should we invite to the wedding?
We can use the continuous or perfect after should and ought to.
I should be doing some work now.
You ought to have said thank you.
B We can also use should to say that something is probable.
They should have my letter by now.
There's only a short queue, so we shouldn't have to wait long.
Should implies 'if all goes well'.
There are no reports of delays, so the train should be on time.
We do not use it for things going wrong.
The train will probably be late.
NOT The train should be late.
C Had better says what is the best thing to do in a particular situation.
I think James had better see a doctor.
I'd better tidy up this mess, hadn't I?
Had better is stronger than should or ought to. I'd better tidy up means that I am going to tidy up because it is the best
way to deal with the problem.
The negative is had better not.
Come on. We'd better not be late.
The lorry had better not park across the entrance.
D
We use be supposed to for what should happen because it is the rule or the normal way of doing things.
You're supposed to wait in the queue.
In the negative it means something isn't allowed.
We're not supposed to keep pets here.
Be supposed to can mean that something is arranged or intended.
I'm supposed to be on holiday, but I keep getting calls from the office.
How is this device supposed to work?
TIP
To talk about what people in general say or believe, we can use be supposed to. Too much sugar is supposed to be bad
for you means that people say too much sugar is bad for you.
67
BE TO, BE ABOUT TO, ETC
A Be to for an arrangement
We can use be + to-infinitive for an official arrangement.
The Prime Minister is to visit Rome.
The two companies are to merge shortly.
Be is often left out in news headlines.
Prime Minister to visit Rome.
B Be to for an order
Be to can also express a rule or an order by a person in authority.
The teacher says we are to wait here.
You're not to stay up late.
No one is to leave this building.
C Be about to and be on the point of

We use be about to for the near future.
The performance is about to start.
Hurry up. The bus is about to leave.
We can use just with be about to and be going to for the very near future.
The bus is just about to leave / is just going to leave.
Be on the point of means the same as be about to. It is followed by an ing-form.
I'm on the point of quitting my job.
There is no time with these phrases.
NOT We're about to leave in ten minutes.
D Be due to
We can sometimes use be due + to-infinitive to talk about a timetable.
The meeting is due to take place today.
The train is due to leave at four twenty.
E Be set to
Be set + to-infinitive is used in news reports for things expected to happen soon.
The player is set to leave the club.
Prices are set to rise once more.
F Be bound/sure/certain to
We use these forms to say what will definitely happen in the future.
There's bound to be trouble.
The president is sure/certain to resign.
G Was to, was about to, etc

We can use the forms in the past tense.
Daniel fell ill on the day he was to go for a job interview.
We saw that the bus was about to leave.
We were on the point of buying the flat when we had second thoughts.
TIP
It is more important to recognize these forms than to use them. You can express most of the meanings differently,
e.g. They have arranged to meet. We're going to leave in a moment. There will definitely be trouble.
68
TIME: AT, ON, AND IN
A We use at for a particular time, e.g. a clock time, a meal time, or a short holiday period.
The match starts at three o'clock.
I'll see you at breakfast.
What are you doing at Christmas?
We're away at the weekend. ( US: on the weekend )
We're very busy at the moment.
At that time there was no internet.
B We use on with a day.
The meeting is on Tuesday / on 8 May.
I won't be here on that day.
What happens on Independence Day?
C We use in with longer periods.
I have to decide in the next few days.
It's busy here in the summer holidays.
The term starts in September.
The company was set up in 1997.
The church was built in the 13th century.
We also use in with part of a day.
I always work better in the afternoon.
But we use on if we say which day.
Why not come over on Friday afternoon?
The incident occurred on the evening of 27 April.
D We use in for how long something takes.

Can you run a mile in four minutes?
We can also use in for a time in the future measured from the present.
We'll take our exams in three weeks.
Compare these examples.
You can walk there in half an hour. ( It takes half an hour. )
I'm going out in half an hour. ( half an hour from now )
E Sometimes we use an expression of time without a preposition.

I received the letter last Thursday.
I'm starting a new course next year.
The same thing happens every time.
I'll see you tomorrow morning.
A week later I got a reply.
We do not normally use at, on, or in with last, next, or this; with every or all; with yesterday ortomorrow; or with the
adverb later.
In some contexts we can either use the preposition or leave it out.
I was feeling unwell (on) that day.
Profits were higher (in) the previous year.
We met (on) the following Monday.
TIP
In informal English, and especially in American English, on is sometimes left out before a day, e.g. I'll see you Monday.
69
PREPOSITIONS OF TIME
A Place and time

Some prepositions of place can also be used with time.
I'll be there between three and half past.
You can do the journey inside an hour.
At, on, and in can also express either place or time.
B During
We use during with an event or a specific period of time.
Nobody works during the festival.
I suddenly felt ill during the meeting.
The office will be closed during August.
I have to be away several times during the next couple of months.
We do not use during + length of time.
The festival went on for five days.
NOT It went on during five days.
During is a preposition; while is a conjunction.
I fell asleep during the film.
I fell asleep while I was watching the film.
C Till/until and by
We use till/until to say when something comes to an end.
We stayed till/until the end of the show.
I'll be working here till/until next April.
Till is more informal than until.
Not ... till/until means that something happens later than expected.
We didn't arrive till one in the morning.
We won't get the money until next year.
By means 'not later than'.
I have to be at work by nine.
They should have replied by now.
By the time I got home, I was exhausted.
She's going to pay me back by Friday. ( on Friday or earlier )
But before Friday means 'earlier than Friday'.
D From ... to/till/until

We use from for the time something starts.
Tickets will be on sale from tomorrow.
From 6 a.m. there's the noise of traffic.
For starting and finishing times we use from ... to or from ... till/until.
The season is from April to September.
The road will be closed from Friday evening until Monday morning.
Americans use through, e.g. from Friday through Monday.
TIP
Do not use till/until for place. Say We walked as far as the bridge, not until the bridge.
70
ADVERB FORMS
A We form many adverbs from an adjective + -ly, e.g. fluent (adj.) fluently (adv.).
Tony speaks French fluently.
For the spelling of adverbs in -ly,
Some adverbs have a form which is unrelated to other words. These
include: always, just, often,never, perhaps, quite, rather, seldom, soon, very.
B Some adjectives end in -ly, e.g. friendly, lovely.
We received a friendly greeting.
We cannot add another -ly to form an adverb. Instead we use a phrase with manner, way, orfashion.
They waved in a friendly manner.
Or we use a different adverb with a similar meaning.
She's a lovely dancer. ( adjective )
She dances beautifully. ( adverb )
We can add -ly to an ing-form.
It's surprisingly cold for August.
But we do not usually add -ly to a form in -ed, except excitedly and exhaustedly.
C Some adverbs have the same form as adjectives, e.g. early, fast, hard, high, long, low, still,straight.
We caught the fast train. ( adjective )
The train was going quite fast. ( adverb )
We didn't have a long wait. ( adjective )
We didn't have to wait long. ( adverb )
D Some adverbs can be with or without -ly, e.g. cheap(ly), direct(ly), fair(ly), slow(ly), tight(ly).
I came as quick/quickly as I could.
The form without -ly is more informal and used only in frequent combinations.
You'd better go slow/slowly along here.
BUT
He opened the parcel slowly.
E Some pairs (e.g. hard, hardly) are both adverbs but have different meanings.
You're working too hard.
There's hardly any time. ( almost no time )
I went to bed late.
I haven't seen Donna lately. ( recently )
Other pairs include: deep, deeply; free, freely; high, highly; near, nearly.
F Good is an adjective, and well is the equivalent adverb.
He's a good player. / He plays well.
For well as an adjective, > > 116 Tip.
TIP
Hourly, daily, weekly, and monthly (from hour, day, etc) can be adjectives or adverbs: A dailynewspaper is
published daily.
71
ADVERBIALS OF MANNER
A Adjectives and adverbs

Look at these examples.
We found an easy solution.
You must be sensible.
An adjective (easy, sensible) comes before a noun or after a linking verb such as be. > > 115D
Now look at the adverbs.
We solved the problem easily.
Try to act sensibly.
An adverb of manner says how something happens. It usually comes after a verb (act) or a verb + object (solved the
problem). Most are formed from an adjective + -ly. > > 123
B Linking verb and action verb
Compare the verbs in these sentences.
Linking verb + adjective:
The official was polite.
Action verb + adverb:
The official listened politely.
NOT He listened polite.
A linking verb is one like be, become, feel, look, seem. An action verb is one like argue,drive, meet, listen, work.
Some verbs can be of either Write.
He looked nervous. ( appeared )
He looked nervously at us. ( directed his eyes )
The atmosphere grew tense. ( became )
The tree grew rapidly. ( increased in size )
C Prepositional phrases of manner
We can use a prepositional phrase.
I chose my words carefully / with care.
He stared at me rather aggressively / in a rather aggressive manner.
The winning numbers are chosen randomly / at random.
D Position
An adverbial of manner usually goes in end position.
The sun still shone brightly.
We continued our work in silence.
A one-word adverb can sometimes come in mid position. > > 122
I quickly ran and got my coat.
It can sometimes come in front position for emphasis.
Gently fry the banana pieces.
The last two examples are more common in writing than in speech.
TIP
If a verb has a similar meaning to be, then it's a linking verb and is followed by an adjective rather than an
adverb. She seemed/looked excited is close to She was excited.
72
COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES
A Regular comparison
Short adjectives usually have a comparative form in -er and a superlative form in -est.
It's warmer in here than outside.
This is the oldest building in the town.
Long adjectives form the comparative and superlative with more and most.
Skiing is more difficult than it looks.
She's the most irritating person I know.
B One-syllable adjectives
Most one-syllable adjectives take -er/-est .
Our new flat is nicer.
NOT Our new flat is more nice.
Some take either -er/-est or more/most.
I feel safer / more safe on the cycle path.
Such adjectives include: clear, fair, free, keen, proud, rude, safe, sure, true.
We use more/most (and not -er/-est) with real, right, wrong and with adjectives in -ed, e.g.bored, pleased.
The story seemed more real in the film.
Those most pleased to go were the kids.
C Two-syllable adjectives
Many of these take more/most.
Our new place is more central.
These adjectives take more/most.
Ending -ful, e.g. careful, hopeful
Ending -less, e.g. helpless, useless
Ending -ing/-ed, e.g. boring, annoyed
Some others, e.g. afraid, central, certain, complex, correct, exact, famous, foolish,frequent, modern, normal, recent.
Some two-syllable adjectives take either -er/-est or more/most.
Use the simplest / most simple method.
They include: able, clever, common, cruel, feeble, gentle, narrow, pleasant, polite, quiet,simple, sincere, stupid, tired.
We use -er/-est with most two-syllable adjectives ending in y (e.g. angry, funny, happy), althoughmore/most is also
possible.
Life would be easier if I had a job.
D Three-syllable adjectives
Adjectives of three or more syllables take more/most.
Your health is the most important thing.
TIP
If you are not sure about the correct form, it is generally safer to use more/most.
73
IRREGULAR COMPARISON AND SPECIAL FORMS
A
The adjectives good and bad have irregular comparative and superlative forms:
good, better, best;
bad, worse, worst.
Last week we saw a good game, but this week we saw an even better one. In fact it's the bestI've seen for a long
time.
We've had bad weather for some time, and now it's getting worse. It's the worst of the winter so far.
B
Far has two different comparative and superlative forms: farther/further and farthest/furthest.
The farthest/furthest moon is 13 million kilometres from Saturn.
Further can mean 'more' or 'additional'.
Let's hope there are no further problems.
Further details on our website.
C
Elder, eldest mean the same as older, oldest. We use the irregular forms mainly to talk about ages in a family.
Have you got an older/elder brother?
Their oldest/eldest daughter married a Russian billionaire.
Elder and eldest go before the noun.
NOT My brother is elder than me.
D
Latest and last mean different things. Latest means 'furthest ahead in time' or 'newest'.
What's the latest time we can leave and still get there on time?
This jacket is the latest fashion.
NOT This jacket is the last fashion.
Last means 'previous' or 'final'.
I had my hair cut last week. ( the week before this one )
The last bus goes at midnight. ( the final bus of the day )
E
Nearest and next mean different things. Nearest means 'the shortest distance away'.
Where's the nearest post office? ( the one that is closest )
Next means 'following in a series'.
I'm going on holiday next week. ( the week after this one )
We have to get out at the next stop. ( the stop after this one )
There's a newsagent's in the next street. ( the street beside this one )
TIP
We can use better and worse as comparative forms of well and ill to talk about health and illness, e.g. I expect I'll be well
again soon. I certainly feel better than I did. I was much worse yesterday.
74
THE PRESENT PERFECT CONTINUOUS
A
Form of the present perfect cont.
The present perfect continuous is the present of have + been + ing-form.
The game has been going on for ages.
You haven't been revising enough.
How long have you been working here?
B
Use
We use the present perfect continuous for an action over a period of time leading up to the present.
Where have you been? I've been waiting here for half an hour.
It's wet here. The roof has been leaking.
We do not use the present simple.
NOT I wait here for half an hour.
The action can be continuing in the present.
I'm waiting for Tom. I've been waiting ages. ( I am still waiting. )
Or the action may have ended recently.
I'm hot because I've been running. ( I stopped running a short time ago. )
We often use for and since. > > 140
We've been living here for six months / since April.
We can also use this tense for a series of repeated actions.
I've been going to evening classes.
Present perfect or present perfect continuous?

Present perfect Present perfect continuous
the result of an action an action going on up to the present
I've washed the car so it's a lot cleaner now. I've been washing the car, so I'm rather wet.
how much/many how long

Tina has written twelve pages of her book. Tina has been writing her report since two o'clock.
repeated actions how many actions

I've been trying to phone all day. I've tried to phone at least twenty times.
a state up to the present (We do not use the continuous for a state.)
My friend has been in hospital for a month.
Note that with live and work, either form is possible, e.g. I've been living here since May or I've lived here since May.
The continuous is more usual.
75
HAVE AND GET
A
The passive with get
We sometimes form the passive with get rather than with be.
Luckily I got accepted at art school.
Lots of people get killed on the roads.
The pattern is used mainly in informal English, and it has a more limited use than be. We can use get to talk about good
or bad things happening.
We can also use get for something happening incidentally, as part of a larger operation.
The dustbin gets emptied once a week.
But it is not used for a planned action.
The railway was privatized in the 1990s.
NOT The railway got privatized.
We use do in simple-tense negatives and questions.
The bins didn't get emptied yesterday.
How often do rugby players get injured?
B
Idioms with get
We use get + passive participle in some idiomatic expressions.
I'll have to get washed. ( wash myself )
Ed has got married. ( married someone )
These include get washed, get shaved, get (un)dressed; get engaged, get married, get divorced.
C
Have/get something done
This pattern means 'cause something to be done'. We use it mainly to talk about professional services to a customer.
I had my car serviced.
I got my car serviced.
This means that I arranged for a garage to service my car. Get is a little informal.
Here are some more examples.
We must have/get the machine repaired.
Lucy has had her kitchen extended.
We're having/getting a new tap fitted.
Where did you have/get your hair cut?
We can also use get informally for a job we do ourselves.
I must get my homework done.
We got everything packed and ready.
D
Have something happen
This pattern has the same form as have something done in C. It often refers to an unpleasant experience.
We had a window broken in the storm.
My sister has had some money stolen.
TIP
Do not confuse had something done and had done something. If we had the grass cut, then someone did it for us. If
we had cut the grass, then we did it before a time in the past (past perfect).
76
PASSIVE VERB FORMS
A passive verb has a form of be and a passive participle.

Active Passive
Present simple They play the game. The game is played.
Present continuous They are playing the game. The game is being played.
Present perfect They have played the game. The game has been played.
Past simple They played the game. The game was played.
Past continuous They were playing the game. The game was being played.
Past perfect They had played the game. The game had been played.
Future They will play the game. The game will be played.
They are going to play the game. The game is going to be played.
We can use short forms, e.g. It's played every year.
B
Negatives and questions
In the negative not comes after the first auxiliary.
Motorists are not killed by cyclists.
The money still hasn't been found.
In a question there is inversion of the subject and (first) auxiliary.
Has the money been found?
When was the fax sent?
C
Modal verbs in the passive
We can use the passive with a modal verb, or with a phrase like have to.
Stamps can be bought at any post office.
The work once had to be done by hand.
The note might have been thrown out.
Animals shouldn't be kept in cages.
Could the process be speeded up?
D
Phrasal verbs in the passive
Some phrasal and prepositional verbs and verbal idioms can be used in the passive.
The flats were knocked down last year.
Has the doctor been sent for?
Slavery should be done away with.
The child is always being made fun of.
The adverb or preposition (down, for, etc) comes after the participle.
TIP
Be + passive participle can express an action or a state. Compare The vase was broken by a guest(action) and The vase
was broken. The pieces lay on the floor. (state)
77
QUANTIFIERS
A
What is a quantifier?
A quantifier is a word like many, no, or some.
many times no tickets some water
A quantifier says how many/much. For example, many means a large quantity. The choice of quantifier can depend on
whether a noun is countable or not.
A quantifier can be more than one word.
lots of fun a few people
Some can have an adverb of degree.
too many emails
quite a lot of money almost all the tickets very little time
We can use a quantifier without a noun.
Most shops are open late, but some close at five. A few close at six.
Of must have a noun phrase or it/them after it.
A lot (of the stores/of them) open late.
We use none (not no) without a noun.
None were open.
B
Large and small quantities
Here are some examples.
A large quantity:
a lot of / lots of letters many questions much discussion
a large number of accidents numerous delays a great deal of work
A neutral quantity:
some money a number of companies
A small quantity:
a few books
a little oil several people a small number of cases
a small amount of electricity
Zero quantity:
no work there isn't any bread
C
Whole and part quantities
To talk about these quantities, we can use words like all and most.
The story is in all (of) the papers.
The bed takes up most of the space.
Half (of) the audience were asleep.
We often use of.
We can use large/small quantifiers with of + determiner to express a whole/part meaning. Compare these examples.
I found some information.
( an amount )
Some of the information was irrelevant.
( a part of the total )
We use none (not no) with of.
None of my friends went to the party.
TIP
We can use the whole/part pattern with a singular noun, e.g. I've read some of this book.
78
ENOUGH, SOME MORE
A
Enough
We can use enough with a plural or uncountable noun.
There aren't enough chairs.
Is there enough room for all of us?
We can use of for a part quantity.
I've seen enough of this film.
B
Plenty of and too many/much
Plenty of means 'enough' or 'more than enough'.
There are plenty of jobs available.
Don't rush. We've got plenty of time.
For 'more than enough' as a bad thing, we use too many/much.
You always take too many clothes on holiday. Why take so many?
I put too much salt in the soup.
C
Another and some more
These express an extra quantity. We use another with a singular noun and some more with a plural or uncountable
noun.
Would you like another sausage?
Have some more carrots.
I'll get some more orange juice.
In some contexts we use any.
There isn't any more orange juice.
Another can also mean 'a different one'.
I'm going to buy another computer to replace this one.
Before more we can also use a lot, lots, many, much, a few, a little, and a bit.
I've got lots more jobs to do after this.
Can't you put a bit more effort into it?
D
Other
Other is an adjective meaning 'different' or 'not the one just mentioned'.
We crossed to the other side of the road.
Sarah was there, but I didn't know any of the other guests.
We can use other without a noun to refer to a thing or a person.
Take one bag. Give me the other (one).
One twin is taller than the other (one).
We can use others without a noun for more than one.
Some pubs serve food, but others don't.
I'm early. The others will be here soon.
Number + other means an extra quantity.
There are four other / four more rooms upstairs.
TIP
You can use another in a phrase expressing an extra period of time, e.g. I'm staying on for another three days / for three
more days.
79
INDIRECT SPEECH (basic)
A
We use direct speech when we quote someone's words.
'I'll ring you later,' said Jack. ( in a story )
'This play really made me laugh.' - The Post ( an advertisement for a play )
In 'indirect speech' or 'reported speech' we report the meaning in our own words and from our own point of view.
Jack said he would ring later.
One critic claims the play is very funny.
The indirect speech is the object of the reporting verbs said and claims.
B
We can use a verb of reporting with a that-clause or a wh-clause.
Polly said that she was going away.
He wondered why it was so quiet.
Verbs of reporting are verbs like agree, ask, believe, hear, know, suggest, think,understand.
We often use that in indirect speech, but in informal English we can leave it out, especially after a common verb like say.
Alice says (that) she'll be five minutes.
C
We can sometimes use a to-infinitive clause or a gerund clause.
Jack promised to ring later.
Someone suggested going for a walk.
D
Sometimes there is an indirect object after the verb of reporting.
No one told me you were coming.
The police have warned the public that the man is dangerous.
Other verbs in this pattern are: advise, assure, inform, promise, reassure, remind.
Sometimes we use a phrase with to.
Can you explain to me what's going on?
I suggested to the others that we should meet them here.
Other verbs in this pattern are: admit, announce, complain, declare, mention, point
out,recommend, report, say, write.
E
We sometimes use an adjective such as sure or certain to introduce indirect speech.
He's sure (that) the figure is wrong.
F
When reporting two or more sentences, we do not need a verb of reporting in every one.
The President said that the situation was under control. He had sent in the army.
The second sentence is indirect speech.
TIP
As well as speech or writing, we can also report thoughts, e.g. I thought I had plenty of time, but I only just made it. The
thought is not necessarily expressed in speech.
80
TELL, SAY, AND ASK
A
We normally use an indirect object after tell.
You told me you didn't like Chinese food.
Josh told us he was going to London.
NOT Josh told he was going to London.
But after say we do not use an indirect object.
You said you didn't like Chinese food.
Josh said he was going to London.
NOT Josh said us he was going to London.
B
We can use either a that-clause or a wh-clause after tell or say.
Kate told me (that) she's fed up.
Kate said (that) she's fed up.
Kate told me what the matter was.
Say + wh-clause is used mostly in a negative statement or a question where the information is not actually reported.
Kate didn't say what the matter was.
Did they say how much it would cost?
C
There are a few expressions where we can use tell without an indirect object.
He likes telling stories / telling jokes.
Don't tell lies. You should tell the truth.
The children learn to tell the time.
Can you tell the difference between tap water and bottled water?
D
After say we can use a phrase with to.
I said to him, 'I've been mugged.'
In indirect speech we prefer these patterns.
I said I'd been mugged.
I told him I'd been mugged.
But we can use a phrase with to if the information is not reported.
The PM said a few words to the visitors.
What did the boss say to you?
E
We use talk and speak to say who spoke, to whom, for how long, or what about.
Daniel was talking to a young woman.
The President spoke for an hour.
We don't talk about politics.
Talk and speak are not verbs of reporting.
Laura said she was tired.
NOT Laura talked/spoke she was tired.
F
We can use ask with or without an indirect object.
Simon looked upset, so I asked (him) if there was anything wrong.
We use tell and ask in indirect orders and requests.
We told/asked Mike to hurry up.
TIP
Remember that you say something, but you tell somebody something.
81
INDIRECT SPEECH
A
People, place, and time
Imagine a situation where Oliver and Tina are at home one afternoon. Tina wants to go out in the car, but it won't start.
She rings the garage and asks a mechanic if he can come and repair it. He is too busy to come immediately, but he
agrees to come the next morning. He says:
OK, I'll be at your house at eight tomorrow morning.
A moment later Tina says to Oliver:
The mechanic says he'll be here at eight tomorrow morning.
Now the speaker is a different person, so where the mechanic said I'll be ..., Tina says He'll be .... And the speaker is in a
different place, so at your house for the mechanic is here for Tina.
Next day the mechanic has not arrived even by nine o'clock, so Tina rings him and says:
You said you would be here by eight this morning.
Now the time has changed. Instead of tomorrow morning, Tina says this morning. And the promise is now out of date,
so will changes to would.
B
Pronouns and possessives
When you report what someone has said, both pronouns and possessives can change.
'I'm really enjoying myself.'
Jade said she was enjoying herself.
'I like your new hairstyle.'
Martin said he liked my new hairstyle.
C
Adverbials of time
Here are some typical changes from direct to indirect speech.
1. Now: then / at that time / immediately
2. Today: yesterday / that day / on Tuesday, etc
3. Yesterday: the day before / the previous day / on Monday, etc
4. Tomorrow: the next day / the following day / on Thursday, etc
5. this week: last week / that week
6. last year: the year before / the previous year / in 2005, etc
7. next month: the month after / the following month / in May, etc
8. an hour ago: an hour before / an hour earlier / at 2.30, etc
TIP
Except when we talk about time, this or that usually changes to the in indirect speech, or the phrase is replaced by it,
e.g. This steak is nice. She said the steak was nice. / She said it was nice.
82
TENSES IN INDIRECT SPEECH
A
We can use a present-tense verb of reporting to report recent statements.
Robert says he's hungry.
In this case we do not change the tense.
I'm hungry.
He says he 's hungry.
B
A verb of reporting is often in a past tense, even when we report recent statements.
He said he was hungry.
We often change the tense in indirect speech from present to past.
I'm hungry.
He said he was hungry.
C
In general we are more likely to change the tense if we are unsure if the statement is still true and still relevant.
You told me he lived in Bath, but actually he lives in Bristol. ( untrue statement )
The forecast said it was going to rain, and it did. ( forecast now out of date )
The past tense is also used to report in a neutral or objective way.
The PM said it was the right decision.
D
The tense change in indirect speech is from present to past.
'I feel awful.' She said she felt awful.
'You're crazy.' He thought I was crazy.
'I've got time.' I said I had time.
If the verb phrase is more than one word, then the first word changes.
'You're lying.' I knew she was lying.
'I've finished.' He said he'd finished.
So the present continuous changes to the past continuous, and so on.
E
A past-tense verb usually changes to the past perfect.
'I won the game.'
He said he'd won.
But He said he won is also possible.
A past perfect verb does not change.
F
Will, can, and may change to would, could, and might.
'We'll be late.'
I thought we'd be late.
'I can't see.'
He said he couldn't see.
Must can be the same or change to have to.
'I must go now.'
Sarah said she must go / she had to go.
Would, could, should, might, ought to, had better, and used to do not change.
'I could help.'
He said he could help.
TIP
Changing the tense after said, told me, etc is always possible, while keeping it the same can be a mistake. So in general it
is safer to change the tense.
83
REPORTING QUESTIONS
A
When we report a question, we use verbs such as ask, enquire, need to find out, want to know, wonder.
We can report a wh-question.
'Where did you eat?'
I asked Elaine where she'd eaten.
'How much is a ticket?'
James enquired how much a ticket was.
'Who have you invited?'
Peter is wondering who we've invited.
'When is the lecture?'
Someone wants to know when the lecture is.
'What size do you take?'
The assistant asked me what size I took.
To report a yes/no question, we use if/whether.
'Is the drug safe?'
People are asking if/whether the drug is safe.
'Has the car been repaired?'
He wants to know if/whether the car has been repaired.
After if/whether we can use or not to stress the need for a yes/no answer.
We need to find out if/whether the drug is safe or not.
We need to find out whether or not the drug is safe.
B
In an indirect question the word order is usually subject + verb, as in a statement.
I'll ask when the bus leaves.
(Compare: The bus leaves at three ten. )
NOT I'll ask when does the bus leave.
But we can use inversion when the reporting verb comes at the end, as a kind of afterthought.
When does the bus leave, I wonder.
C
In an indirect question the tense can change from present to past in the same way as in a statement.
'What do you want?'
The man asked what we wanted.
'Can we take photos?'
Anna wondered if we could take photos.
D
We can use an indirect question form after say, tell, etc when we are talking about the answer to a question.
Did Zoe say when she would call?
I wish you'd tell me whether you agree.
I haven't been informed what time the flight gets in.
TIP
You can use an indirect question when you approach someone to ask politely for information. Could you tell me where
the lift is, please? is more polite than just asking Where is the lift?
84
ADJECTIVES (order)
A
When two or more adjectives come before a noun, there is often a fixed order.
a nice big warm fire
NOT a warm big nice fire
The order of adjectives depends mainly on the kind of meaning they express. An expression of opinion like nice comes
first.
B
When we use an adjective and a noun modifier, the adjective comes first.
the old town wall
dark winter evenings
C
The modifiers usually go in the following order, starting with group 1.
1. Opinion: nice, excellent, awful, etc
2. Size: long, large, small, short, etc
3. Most other qualities: clear, busy, famous, friendly, soft, quiet, etc
4. Age: new, old
5. Shape: round, square, fat, narrow, etc
6. Colour: blue, red, white, black, etc
7. Participle forms: running, missing, covered, broken, etc
8. Origin: British, Italian, American, etc
9. Material: sandy, paper, plastic, etc
10. Write: electronic, human, chemical, money (problems), etc
11. Purpose: alarm (clock), tennis (court), walking (boots), etc
Here are some examples.
an old cardboard box ( age + material )
a new improved model ( age + participle )
a small square room ( size + shape )
two excellent public tennis courts ( opinion + Write + purpose )
In general the word closest to the noun has the closest link with it. In the phrase excellent public tennis courts, the
word tennis is closely connected with courts.
The rules are not absolute. We may prefer a short word before a long one.
a big horrible building
D
A modifier can be a two-word compound.
an old pale blue football shirt a powerful high-speed electric drill
E
With two similar adjectives, the shorter one usually comes first.
a bright, cheerful smile Here we can also use and.
a bright and cheerful smile
And is not used with different meanings.
a lovely old city
NOT a lovely and old city
TIP
We use and when the adjectives come after a verb like be, e.g. The city is old and lovely. An expression of opinion (
lovely) comes last.
85
CONDITIONALS
A
Most conditional sentences have a clause starting with if.
If you haven't got TV, you can't watch it.
We can sit down if we want to.
If I phone the Helpline, they might be able to give me the information.
If you lived on the planet Mercury, you'd have four birthdays in an Earth year.
We can use many different verb forms in conditional sentences. In an open condition (when something may or may not
happen), we use the present tense (If I phone ...). For something unreal we often use the past tense ( If you lived ...).
B
There are some verb forms which often go together. These patterns are usually called Writes 1, 2, and 3.
Write 1: If the company fails, we will lose all our money.
Write 2: If the company failed, we would lose all our money.
Write 3: If the company had failed, we would have lost all our money.
There is another pattern we can call Write 0.
Write 0: If the company fails, we lose all our money.
C
The if-clause usually comes before the main clause, but it can come after it.
If you're in a hurry, you needn't wait.
You needn't wait if you're in a hurry.
A comma between the clauses is more likely when the if-clause comes first.
D
We can use conditional sentences in different ways:not only to give information but also when we request, advise,
criticize, and so on.
Requesting: If you're going into town, could you post this letter for me, please?
Advising: If the headache persists, you should consult a doctor.
Criticizing: If you'd remembered your passport, we wouldn't be in such a rush.
Suggesting: We can go for a walk if you like.
Offering: If you're hungry, help yourself.
Warning: If you don't copy the file, you risk losing the information.
Threatening: If you don't leave immediately, I'll call the police.
TIP
The standard Writes of conditional are not the only possible verb patterns. In general we can use verb forms in the same
way as in other sentences. We can say We've finished, so we can go home, so we can also say If we've finished, we can
go home.
86
0 AND 1 CONDITIONALS
A
Write 0 is if ... + present ... + present.
If the doorbell rings, the dog barks.
The batteries take over if we lose power.
One thing always follows automatically from another.
Write 0 is also used for the automatic result of a possible future action.
If we win the league, we get promoted.
B
Write 1 is if ... + present ... + will.
If it rains, we'll get wet.
If we don't hurry, we won't be in time.
The milk will go off if you leave it by the radiator.
This is an open condition. If it rains means that it may or may not rain.
We do not normally use will in the if-clause.
NOT If it will rain,...
But we can use will in the if-clause for an action happening later than the action in the main clause.
If this medicine does me / will do me good, I'll take it.
C
As well as the present simple, we can use the present continuous or perfect.
If they're having a party, it'll be noisy.
If I've finished my work by ten, I'll probably watch a film on TV.
As well as will, we can use other modal verbs and similar expressions.
If they ask me, how should I answer?
I'm going to look silly if it all goes wrong.
We can use the imperative.
If you make a mistake, correct it.
D
A present tense in the if-clause can refer to the present.
If it's raining, I'm not going out.
If you think you can do the job, why not apply for it?
E
We can use will in the if-clause for willingness and won't for a refusal.
If Tom will lend a hand, we'll soon finish.
If the car won't start, I'll take the bus.
F
Instead of a Write 1 with if you + simple present, we can use these patterns in informal speech.
Touch me and I'll scream. ( If you touch me, I'll scream. )
Go away or I'll scream. ( If you don't go away, I'll scream. )
TIP
We can use will in an if-clause for a request, e.g. If you'll take a seat, someone will be with you in a moment. If
you'll just sign here, please. Thank you.
87
2 CONDITIONALS
A
Write 2 is if ... + past ... + would.
If I had the money, I would buy a yacht.
I'd tell you the answer if I knew it.
If the plane wasn't safe, we wouldn't fly.
The past tense expresses an unreal condition. If I had the money means that I haven't really got it, but I am imagining a
situation where I have.
We do not normally use would in the if-clause.
NOT If I would have the money, ...
B
We also use Write 2 for the future.
If we left early tomorrow, we'd be in Manchester by lunch time.
If you lost the video, you would have to pay for a new one.
Compare Writes 1 and 2.
1: If we take a taxi, it'll be quicker.
2: If we took a taxi, it'd be quicker.
Write 1 expresses an open possibility we may or may not take a taxi. Write 2 expresses a theoretical possibility
something less real.
Normally we do not mix Writes 1 and 2.
NOT If you break it, you'd be in trouble.
NOT If you broke it, you'll be in trouble.
B
As well as the past simple, we can use the past continuous or could.
If the sun was shining, it'd be perfect.
If I could have my child looked after, I would go out to work.
As well as would, we can use other modal verbs such as could or might in the main clause.
If I had a light, I could see.
If we could re-start the computer, that might solve the problem.
We can also use continuous forms.
If Shakespeare was alive today, he would be writing for television.
C
We can use would in the if-clause for a request.
If you'd just sign here, please. Thank you.
If you wouldn't mind holding the line, I'll try to put you through.
In a main clause we can use will or can.
We can also use would like in an if-clause, e.g. for a suggestion.
If you'd like to see the exhibition, it would be nice to go together.
TIP
We can use a Write 2 conditional for a polite request, e.g. Would it be all right if I brought a friend?This is less direct and
so more polite than Will it be all right if I bring a friend?
88
3 CONDITIONALS
A Write 3 is if ... + past perfect ... + would + perfect.
If you had come on your bike, you would have been in time.
My brother would have been promoted if he 'd stayed in his job.
We'd have gone to the concert if we'd known about it. ( We would have gone if we hadknown. )
The verb forms refer to something unreal, an imaginary past action. If you had come on your bikemeans that really you
didn't come on your bike, but I am imagining a situation where you did.
We do not use the past simple or past perfect in the main clause.
We would have got lost if we hadn't bought a map.
NOT We had got lost if we hadn't bought a map.
And we do not normally use would in the if-clause.
If you'd lent him the money, you would never have got it back.
NOT If you would have lent him the money, you would never have got it back.
You may hear clauses such as if we would have done in informal speech. But many people regard it as incorrect.
B We can use could + perfect in the if-clause.
If I could have warned you in time, I would have done.

As well as would, we can use other modal verbs such as could or might in the main clause.
If I'd written the address down, I could have saved myself a lot of trouble.
The plan might not have worked if we hadn't had a piece of luck.
We can also use continuous forms.
If he had had any money, he wouldn't have been sleeping on the streets
C We can mix Writes 2 and 3.
If Tom really was ambitious, he would have found a decent job years ago.
If you hadn't woken me up in the night, I wouldn't feel so tired now.
We can also use a Write 1 condition with a Write 3 main clause.
If you know London so well, you shouldn't have got so hopelessly lost.
TIP
We can use a Write 3 condition to point out that we were not at fault and to put the blame on someone else, e.g. If you
hadn't insisted on taking so much stuff, we wouldn't have had to pay excess baggage.
89
MORE ABOUT IF
A
When and if
Compare these sentences.
When Amy comes, can you let her in? ( Amy will come. )
If Amy comes, can you let her in? ( Amy might come. )
We use if (not when) for an unreal condition.
If I had a camera, I could take a photo.
In some contexts when and if are both possible.
I feel nervous when/if I'm flying.
B
Then
After an if-clause we can use then in the main clause.Then emphasizes the link between the two ideas.
If the figures don't add up, then you must have made a mistake.
C
Short clauses
We can sometimes use a short clause with if without a subject and verb.
I'd like a sea view if (that is) possible.
If (you are) in difficulty, call this number.
D
What if
What if asks you to imagine a situation.
What if we can't get tickets?
What if you'd had an accident?
E
Even if
Look at this example.
I'm going to solve this puzzle even if it takes me all night. ( It may or may not take me all night, but I'm going to
solve it. )
F
Unless
Unless with a positive verb is equivalent to if with a negative verb.
We'll go broke unless we find a sponsor. ( ... if we don't find a sponsor )
The main clause can be negative.
You can't play unless you're a member. ( You can play only if you're a member. )
We do not normally use unless meaning if ... not in an unreal condition.
If I hadn't fallen, I would have won.
NOT Unless I had fallen, ...
And we do not use unless when talking about a feeling caused by something not happening.
I'll be upset if you don't come.
NOT I'll be upset unless you come.
TIP
We can use what if to make a suggestion, e.g. What if we all meet up this evening?
90
EXPRESSING A CONDITION
A
As long as, provided, etc
As well as if, we can use as/so long as to express a condition.
You can smoke as long as you do it outside the building.
I don't care what a car looks like so long as it gets me from A to B.
We can also use provided (that), providing (that), and on condition that.
The machine will last for years provided (that) it is looked after properly.
The country was given aid on condition that it signed a trade agreement.
These conjunctions are more formal.
B
In case of, with, etc
We can use the prepositions in case of and in the event of.
In case of fire, break glass. ( on a sign )
( If there is a fire, ... )
In the event of a major emergency, local hospitals would be alerted.
( If there was a major emergency, ... )
The prepositions with, without, and but for can also express a condition.
With more time, we could do it properly.
( If we had more time, ... )
Without the map, I'd have got lost.
( If I hadn't had the map, ... )
But for you, I'd have drowned.
( If it hadn't been for you, ... )
In that case means 'if that is so'.
I've lost my ticket. ~ In that case, you'll have to buy another one.
Otherwise means 'if that is not so'.
Hold on tight, otherwise you might fall.
C
In case
Compare if and in case.
I'll get some money from the bank if I need some.
( I'll wait until I need some and then get it. )
I'll get some money from the bank in case I need some.
( I'll get some now because I might need it later. )
We can use should after in case.
I had some water in case I woke up / I should wake up thirsty in the night.
We can use in case as an adverbial.
I'll take an umbrella (just) in case.
TIP
In American English in case can mean the same as if, e.g. In case you need any help, let me know.
91
TO-INFINITIVE or A GERUND
A
Some verbs can take either a to-infinitive or a gerund with no difference in meaning.
I hate to arrive / hate arriving late.
We intend to take / intendtaking action.
It soon started to rain / started raining.
These verbs are: begin, bother, can't bear, can't
stand, cease, commence, continue, hate,intend, like, love, prefer, propose, start.
B
We usually avoid two ing-forms together.
I was intending to study law.
NOT I was intending studying law.
After begin, continue, and start, a state verb usually has the to-infinitive form.
I began to understand the problems.
C
Like, love, and hate take either form.
Kate likes to cook / likes cooking.
I hate to travel / hate travelling by bus.
Like takes a to-infinitive when something is a good idea rather than a pleasure.
I like to keep the place tidy.
Would like, would love, and would hate normally take a to-infinitive.
Our guest would like to say something.
We 'd love to go on a cruise.
D
The to-infinitive and gerund have different meanings after the verbs on this page.
Remember/forget + to-infinitive is about whether we do necessary actions.
Did you remember to turn off the gas?
You forgot to sign the form.
But we use a gerund for memories.
I can remember waking up in the night.
I'll never forget running that marathon.
Regret + to-infinitive is for bad news.
We regret to inform you that your application has been unsuccessful.
Regret + gerund is about the past.
I regret wasting so much time.
Try + to-infinitive means to do your best.
I'm trying to light a fire.
Try + gerund means to see if the action will solve the problem.
Try pouring some petrol on it.
Mean + to-infinitive has the sense of 'intend'.
Sorry. I didn't mean to step on your foot.
Mean + gerund is about a situation making an action necessary.
An early flight means getting up at six.
TIP
Stop takes a gerund, e.g. Stop dreaming and do some work. But we can also use a to-infinitive of purpose after stop, e.g.
I stopped to buy a newspaper.
92
UNREAL PAST AND SUBJUNCTIVE
A
The unreal present and past
After as if, as though, if, imagine, suppose, and supposing, we can use the past tense for something unreal in the
present or something unlikely to happen in the future.
Imagine you want/wanted to murder someone. How would you go about it?
Suppose we win/won the lottery.
After it's time and would rather, we do not normally use the present tense.
It's time you had your hair cut.
I'd rather we all travelled together.
For an unreal situation in the past, we use the past perfect.
Suppose you'd fallen. What then?
He walked past as if he hadn't seen me.
B
The subjunctive
The subjunctive is the base form of a verb. There is no -s in the third person singular.
We propose that work go ahead.
It is important that exact records be kept.
We can use the subjunctive in a that-clause saying that something is necessary. It follows a clause with
e.g. demand, essential, insist, recommend, request, suggest.
The subjunctive is rather formal and used more in America than in Britain, where other forms are often used.
We propose that work should go ahead.
It is important that exact records are kept.
There is a past subjunctive form were, which we can use instead of was in the first and third person singular.
If I was/were a bit taller, I could reach.
Suppose the story was/were true.
We can use it after as if, suppose, etc.
C
Verbs after wish
To wish for a future change, we use would.
I wish Simon would reoly to my emails.
To wish that the present situation could be different, we use the past or could.
I wish I had more spare time.
NOT I wish I would have more spare time.
I wish I could help, but I can't.
For a wish about the past, we use the past perfect or could + perfect.
I wish I'd never bought this lousy car.
I wish you could have come to our party.
We can use if only instead of I wish.
If only I had more spare time.
TIP
If I were you is useful for giving people advice, e.g. If I were you, I wouldn't worry.
93
CLAUSES OF TIME
A
Conjunctions of time
A clause of time often begins with a conjunction.
After we'd finished, we all had a rest.
Think carefully before you decide.
I've changed my job since I last saw you.
Jack could swim when he was a baby.
Others include: as, as soon as, once, till/until, whenever, while.
B
Non-finite clauses of time
We can use a gerund with after, before, on, and since.
Think carefully before deciding.
We can use a participle after once, until, when, whenever, and while.
Take care when crossing the road.
Please wait until told to proceed.
We can also use a participle without a conjunction.
Take care crossing the road.
C
When, while, and as
We use these words for things happening at the same time. While and as suggest something continuing.
The model sat still while we drew her.
As I was cycling along, I saw a fox.
But for a time in your life, use when.
I'll be a millionaire when I'm thirty.
We also use when with two short actions one after the other.
When I clicked the icon, everything froze.
When can also mean 'every time'.
I cycle to work when/whenever it's fine.
We can use as (not while) to say that one change goes with another.
The mixture hardens as it cools.
D
As soon as, etc
As soon as means that one thing comes immediately after another.
As soon as the gates were open, the crowds rushed in.
We can use these patterns with no sooner and hardly with a similar meaning to as soon as.
Emma was no sooner in bed than the phone rang.
I had hardly started work when I felt a pain in my back.
We can also use inversion.
No sooner was Emma in bed than ...
Hardly had I started work when ...
TIP
Do not use by as a conjunction. Use by the time, e.g. It was midday by the time I got to the office, not It was midday by I
got to the office.
94
RELATIVE CLAUSES
A
Relative pronouns
A relative clause follows a noun phrase. The clause identifies which one, or it adds information. A relative pronoun
(e.g. who, which, that) replaces a personal pronoun.
The boy who won got a prize.
NOT the boy who he won
The film that we saw was really good.
NOT the film that we saw it
We can sometimes use a clause without a relative pronoun.
The film we saw was really good.
B
Commas with relative clauses
Some clauses are separated off from the rest of the sentence by one or two commas and by a short pause in speech.
Arsenal, who are third, play at Chelsea.
This clause adds information about Arsenal. The sentence would make sense without it.
A clause without commas or pause usually identifies which one we mean.
The team that Chelsea face is Arsenal.
The team is Arsenal on its own would not make sense.
C
Writes of relative clause
There are five functions that relative clauses can perform.
Identifying clause
A relative clause without commas can identify which one we mean.
Who was the man who said hello?
Classifying clause
A relative clause without commas can say what kind of thing we are talking about.
We're looking for a pub that serves food.
The clause that serves food describes the kind of pub we mean.
Clause used for emphasis
We can use a relative clause without commas in a pattern with it + be.
It's my husband who does the cooking.
Adding clause
A relative clause with commas can add more information.
I was with Ted, who lives upstairs.
Connective clause
A relative clause with a comma can tell us what happened next.
I shouted to the man, who ran off.
In spoken English we use two main clauses.
I shouted to the man, and he ran off.
TIP
Sometimes a relative clause is separated from the noun it relates to, e.g. The bus was leaving that we wanted to catch.
But in writing you should put the clause next to the noun, e.g. The bus that we wanted to catch was leaving.
95
Reading
96
UNIT 1 READING Exercise 1/1
You are going to read a text about film-makers, the Wachowski Brothers.
For questions 18, choose the answer (A, B, C or D) which you think fits best according to the text
Quickly read the title and the extract for gist. Look at the context, reading what comes before and after to work out
the meaning of unknown expressions.
1 Walking around the surprisingly tiny set of the Wachowski brothers latest movie, Speed Racer, is like stepping into a
real-life version of a colourful cartoon. One minute stage in the studios has been transformed into a vivid home, full of
bright orange plastic chairs and shelves cluttered with all kinds of multi-coloured objects, seemingly taken from the
fifties and sixties. At first glance, this bright set seems rather strange. After all, the brothers are the creators of the dark
and threatening world of The Matrix.
2 The inspiration for the brothers latest film was an animation film they had both seen called Ice Age 2. They thought it
was great family fun and they wanted to make a film for their nieces and nephews. Speed Racer was the opportunity to
tackle a fresh idea. The original show was a Japanese series featuring a young racing car driver and shown on American
television as Speed Racer. In the film, the brothers set out to create something even more fantastic than their Matrix
films.
3 Animation usually involves drawing images on computers, but for Speed Racer the brothers decided to do something
different. They thought it would be entertaining to take that idea and apply photographic techniques. They wanted to
make a live action movie built out of layers of photographs.
4 To create their eye-popping universe, the film-makers shot backgrounds in Greece, Morocco, Italy, France and
Germany along with Death Valley and sections of the Californian coast, using still photography. All the locations were
shot months in advance of principal photography, and thousands of options were brought to the 3D Visualization Unit,
who then created a series of very unusual landscapes. For example, out of the window of a Moroccan palace, you can
see the Italian Alps. These strange combinations dont necessarily make sense, but they create very stimulating images.
5 The story follows the evil Royalton Industries attempt to bring top driver Speed (played by Emile Hirsch) onto their
racing team. When he refuses, the companys crazy owner decides to get his revenge, while Speed discovers that the
evil firm is fixing some of the biggest grand prix races. This is the cue for a showdown between Speed and Royaltons
own devilish driver, played by Korean pop star Rain.
6 There are some great races in the original story, but its only now that filmmakers can do them justice and produce
such stunning visual effects. The technology has now advanced enough to be able to do it. Earlier, theyd be trying to
have the cars driving down crazy tracks, jumping in the air, and doing things which, basically, cant be done in real life.
7 When the brothers started The Matrix, those first images of flying bullets in slow time were done with still cameras,
128 in a row. But the technology has developed so much with computer programs, such as Quick Time Virtual Reality,
that they dont need to do that any more. The technology moves forward with every film they make, and theyre
definitely going to change things with this one as well.
8 It took a long time to bring the film to the cinema screen. Joe Silver, the Wachowski brothers producing partner, first
acquired the rights for a big screen adaptation of Speed Racer in 1996, but despite attempts by at least eight writers, he
struggled to find a satisfying script. When working with the brothers on V for Vendetta, he asked them to outline a story,
and thats how it all started. They did amazing things when they made Vendetta in Berlin, and its incredible what
theyve learned to do since then. Whatever phrase you want to use pushing the barriers, setting new standards the
Wachowskis are evolving a new way of picture making.
97
READING EXERCISE 1/1
1. What comment does the writer make about the set of the Wachowski brothers latest movie?
a) Its the kind of set the brothers have a lot of fun building.
b) Its a type of set the brothers arent used to building.
c) It reminds people of movie sets the brothers made years ago.
d) It is based on a cartoon the brothers made quite recently.
2. The Wachowski brothers decided to go ahead with their latest film because they wanted to
a) make a film which would appeal to their own families.
b) recreate a television series originally made in America.
c) create a film which would appeal to older audiences.
d) produce something better than they had done before.
3. What is different about the Wachowski brothers animated film?

a) It consists of images drawn on a computer.
b) It has no similarity to a live action movie.
c) It is made up solely of hand-drawn images.
d) It relies on layers of photographs for its images.
4. What technique did the Wachowski brothers use to shoot their film?
a) They filmed all the background scenery first in the USA.
b) They filmed the backgrounds after the main photography.
c) They created the background scenes separately in a special unit.
d) They used very few background scenes in the final version.
5. What is the film mainly about?
a) a drivers attempt to win a grand prix race
b) a competition between two racing drivers
c) an attempt by a racing driver to fix races that he takes part in
d) a struggle between a racing driver and an evil racing team
6. What does the writer mean by the phrase do them justice in paragraph 6?
a) deal with something in the way it deserves
b) give an equal opportunity to
c) show equal respect for
d) be fair towards
7. What does this one refer to in paragraph 7?
a) a still camera
b) the film
c) a new technology
d) a computer program
8. What problem did Joe Silver have producing the film?
a) He found it difficult to buy the rights to the film.
b) He couldnt find a writer willing to produce a script.
c) He wasnt satisfied with the scripts that writers had produced.
d) He couldnt persuade the Wachowskis to do the film.
98
Reading Exercise 1/2
Word focus: Descriptive adjectives
Choose the correct adjectives from the text to match the meanings. Use each word once only. There is one word you do
not need to use.
1 Walking around the surprisingly tiny set of the Wachowski brothers latest movie, Speed Racer, is like stepping into a
real-life version of a colourful cartoon. One minute stage in the studios has been transformed into a vivid home, full of
bright orange plastic chairs and shelves cluttered with all kinds of multi-colored objects, seemingly taken from the fifties
and sixties. At first glance, this bright set seems rather strange. After all, the brothers are the creators of the dark and
threatening world of The Matrix.
2 The inspiration for the brothers latest film was an animation film they had both seen called Ice Age 2. They thought it
was great family fun and they wanted to make a film for their nieces and nephews. Speed Racer was the opportunity to
tackle a fresh idea. The original show was a Japanese series featuring a young racing car driver and shown on American
television as Speed Racer. In the film, the brothers set out to create something even more fantastic than their Matrix
films.
3 Animation usually involves drawing images on computers, but for Speed Racer the brothers decided to do something
different. They thought it would be entertaining to take that idea and apply photographic techniques. They wanted to
make a live action movie built out of layers of photographs.
4 To create their eye-popping universe, the film-makers shot backgrounds in Greece, Morocco, Italy, France and
Germany along with Death Valley and sections of the Californian coast, using still photography. All the locations were
shot months in advance of principal photography, and thousands of options were brought to the 3D Visualisation Unit,
who then created a series of very unusual landscapes. For example, out of the window of a Moroccan palace, you can
see the Italian Alps. These strange combinations dont necessarily make sense, but they create very stimulating images.
5 The story follows the evil Royalton Industries attempt to bring top driver Speed (played by Emile Hirsch) onto their
racing team. When he refuses, the companys crazy owner decides to get his revenge, while Speed discovers that the
evil firm is fixing some of the biggest grand prix races. This is the cue for a showdown between Speed and Royaltons
own devilish driver, played by Korean pop star Rain.
6 There are some great races in the original story, but its only now that filmmakers can do them justice and produce
such stunning visual effects. The technology has now advanced enough to be able to do it. Earlier, theyd be trying to
have the cars driving down crazy tracks, jumping in the air, and doing things which, basically, cant be done in real life.
7 When the brothers started The Matrix, those first images of flying bullets in slow time were done with still cameras,
128 in a row. But the technology has developed so much with computer programs, such as Quick Time Virtual Reality,
that they dont need to do that any more. The technology moves forward with every film they make, and theyre
definitely going to change things with this one as well.
8 It took a long time to bring the film to the cinema screen. Joe Silver, the Wachowski brothers producing partner, first
acquired the rights for a big screen adaptation of Speed Racer in 1996, but despite attempts by at least eight writers, he
struggled to find a satisfying script. When working with the brothers on V for Vendetta, he asked them to outline a story,
and thats how it all started. They did amazing things when they made Vendetta in Berlin, and its incredible what
theyve learned to do since then. Whatever phrase you want to use pushing the barriers, setting new standards the
Wachowskis are evolving a new way of picture making.
99
Choose the correct adjectives from the text to match the meanings.
Use each word once only. There is one word you do not need to use.
1. with many different colours: __________________________________________________.

2. new and different: _________________________________________________________.
3. interesting and exciting: _____________________________________________________.
4. with strong and intense colours: _______________________________________________.
5. very attractive and impressive: _______________________________________________.
6. full of light: _________________________________________________________.
Word focus: Same words, different meanings. Choose the correct words to complete the sentences. Use each word
twice.
set, rights, minute, top, shot
1. For each film they do, ----actors can earn millions of dollars.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
2. You need a microscope to see it. Its --- .
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
3. They wanted to make her book into a film. She sold the---- to the book for 2 million.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
4. I was annoyed when I broke the plate because it was part of a -----.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
5. Wait here. Ill be back in a----- .
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
6. The president was--- in the leg, but he survived the attack.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
7. An international conference on human------ will be held in London next week.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
8. Very few people have stood on the------ of this mountain.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
100
Missing sentences
First, read the text to form an impression of what it is about and how it is organised. This will help you decide where
the missing sentences go.
You are going to read an article about learning Spanish. Seven sentences have been removed from the article.
Choose from sentences AH the one which fits each gap (17).
There is one extra sentence which you do not need to use.
A. The method you choose is probably down to your personality, ability and lifestyle.
B. You need to be tolerant and respectful of others in return for the total immersion experience.
C. Even with only a slight grasp of the language, everything from shopping to eating out and using public transport
was far easier and more pleasurable.
D. Pick a favourite, where you're familiar with the script, and read the Spanish or listen to the soundtrack instead.
E. It may be the same language, but there are many differences in pronunciation, vocabulary and idioms.
F. Fast learners can whizz through without having to wait for others to catch up, while perfectionists can go back
over lessons again and again.
G. It also offers a sense of achievement and a more enriching experience in another country.
H. Either is a good option if you favour the structure of a qualified teacher and, of course, it's a social activity too.
If you love Spain but can't speak the language, take heart there are plenty of enjoyable and rewarding ways to learn it,
as Zoe Ross explains.
Forget about childhood memories learning a language is fun! 1 ----- Added to which, it's polite and, in some
circumstances, essential. I speak from experience. With an opportunity to live in Barcelona for a few months last year,
and little more than 'si', 'non' and 'por favor' in my vocabulary, I looked into ways to immerse myself in Spanish. My aim
was to learn well, but quickly and the rewards were instant. 2 --- But I wasn't fooling myself. A little wasn't anywhere
near enough.
So it's good to discover, as I did, that if you really want to learn a new language, there are now so many ways to do it. 3 -
--- If you want a bit of preparation before your trip, you'll find that most cities and large towns have language courses
run by professionally-trained teachers. And it's the same in Spain. Some courses take a classical approach, building up
vocabulary, grammar and confidence gradually, with possibly an exam qualification at the end. Others, usually described
as 'conversational' courses, offer a less academic method aimed at getting by in everyday situations. 4 ---- But with
usually only one or two lessons a week, progress can be slow and you have to work at the rate of everyone else in the
class frustrating if you're a fast learner.
Many reputable companies now offer the opportunity to live with a Spanish family as part of a language course. It's an
excellent option in terms of learning Spaniards are a gregarious bunch so anything from a lively political debate to
gossip about the neighbours may be held around the dinner table, and it's up to you to wade in and keep up. But it takes
a certain kind of person to adapt to this choice. 5 --- Self-study, in the form of CDs or language software to load onto a
PC, is an increasingly expanding market. With both text and sound, you learn to read, write and speak Spanish. Many
offer 'homework' exercises to re-cap on what you've learned and are available from beginner to advanced levels, so you
can continue to improve to an almost fluent degree. This option doesn't suit everybody, however, particularly if you lack
self-motivation, but the real bonus is the flexibility. Learn during your lunch hour, or on an MP3 player on the way to
work, or at three in the morning if it takes your fancy! Progress is also entirely personal. 6 ---- With a smattering of
Spanish under your belt, there are numerous ways that you can continue to improve. There are the many films on DVD
which offer the choice to view in numerous languages or provide foreign subtitles. 7---- Whichever of these options you
choose, my advice is to get stuck in. Spanish is a comparatively easy language, and with a few friendly gesticulations
thrown in, you'll feel like a local in no time. Even if the Spaniards you encounter speak faultless English, and you have
only a few words and phrases to hand, you'll get a much deeper insight into their joyful culture.
Buen viaje!
101
____________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________
102
Words and meanings
HASTA LA VISTA, BABY!

If you love Spain but can't speak the language, take heart there are plenty of enjoyable and rewarding ways to learn
it, as Zoe Ross explains.
1 Forget about childhood memories learning a language is fun! It also offers a sense of achievement and a more
enriching experience in another country. Added to which, it's polite and, in some circumstances, essential. I speak from
experience. With an opportunity to live in Barcelona for a few months last year, and little more than 'si', 'non' and 'por
favor' in my vocabulary, I looked into ways to immerse myself in Spanish. My aim was to learn well but quickly and the
rewards were instant. Even with only a slight grasp of the language, everything from shopping to eating out and using
public transport was far easier and more pleasurable. But I wasn't fooling myself. A little wasn't anywhere near enough.
2 So it's good to discover, as I did, that if you really want to learn a new language, there are now so many ways to do it.
The method you choose is probably down to your personality, ability and lifestyle. If you want a bit of preparation
before your trip, you'll find that most cities and large towns have language courses run by professionally-trained
teachers. And it's the same in Spain. Some courses take a classical approach, building up vocabulary, grammar and
confidence gradually, with possibly an exam qualification at the end. Others, usually described as 'conversational'
courses, offer a less academic method aimed at getting by in everyday situations. Either is a good option if you favour
the structure of a qualified teacher and, of course, it's a social activity. But with usually only one or two lessons a week,
progress can be slow and you have to work at the rate of everyone else in the class frustrating if you're a fast learner.
3 Many reputable companies now offer the opportunity to live with a Spanish family as part of a language course. It's an
excellent option in terms of learning Spaniards are a gregarious bunch so anything from a lively political debate to
gossip about the neighbours may be held around the dinner table, and it's up to you to wade in and keep up. But it takes
a certain kind of person to adapt to this choice. You need to be tolerant and respectful of others in return for the total
immersion experience.
4 Self-study, in the form of CDs or language software to load onto a PC, is an increasingly expanding market. With both
text and sound, you learn to read, write and speak Spanish. Many offer 'homework' exercises to re-cap on what you've
learned and are available from beginner to advanced levels, so you can continue to improve to an almost fluent degree.
This option doesn't suit everybody, however, particularly if you lack self-motivation, but the real bonus is the flexibility.
Learn during your lunch hour, or on an MP3 player on the way to work, or at three in the morning if it takes your fancy!
Progress is also entirely personal. Fast learners can whiz through without having to wait for others to catch up, while
perfectionists can go back over lessons again and again.
5 With a smattering of Spanish under your belt, there are numerous ways that you can continue to improve. There are
the many films on DVD which offer the choice to view in numerous languages or provide foreign subtitles. Pick a
favourite, where you're familiar with the script, and read the Spanish or listen to the soundtrack instead.
6 Whichever of these options you choose, my advice is to get stuck in. Spanish is a comparatively easy language, and
with a few friendly gesticulations thrown in, you'll feel like a local in no time. Even if the Spaniards you encounter speak
faultless English, and you have only a few words and phrases to hand, you'll get a much deeper insight into their joyful
culture.
Buen viaje!
103
Reading Exercise2/ 2
Find this phrase in the text and click on the best explanation (A, B, C or D) for the word in italics.
1. a more enriching experience (paragraph 1)
a) money-making c) profitable
b) rewarding d) healthy
2. a slight grasp of the language (paragraph 1)
a) no knowledge c) a reasonable awareness
b) some understanding d) a wide knowledge
3. an excellent option (paragraph 3)
a) way c) choice
b) suggestion d) decision
4. a smattering of Spanish (paragraph 5)
a) a lot of c) a sufficient amount of
b) an average amount of d) a little bit of
5. a few friendly gesticulations (paragraph 6)
a) actions c) hand movements
b) facial expressions d) comments
6. faultless English (paragraph 6)
a) formal c) inaccurate
b) perfect d) quite good

Phrasal verbs and meanings
Find the phrases in the text and choose the correct definitions to match the phrasal verbs in italics and bold.
There is one extra definition which you do not need.
manage with what you have enter discussion or argument
repeat or revise start doing (something) enthusiastically
reach someone who is ahead increase little by little
not be able to cope with
1. building up vocabulary, grammar and confidence gradually (paragraph 2)

________________________________________________________________________
2. a less academic method aimed at getting by in everyday situations. (paragraph 2)
________________________________________________________________________
3. it's up to you to wade in (paragraph 3)
________________________________________________________________________
4. without having to wait for others to catch up (paragraph 4)
________________________________________________________________________
5. perfectionists can go back over lessons (paragraph 4)
________________________________________________________________________
6. my advice is to get stuck in. (paragraph 6)
________________________________________________________________________
104
You are going to read an article about ranches (large farms) where visitors can stay in different parts of the world.
For questions 115, read the article and choose from the places (AD).
The places may be chosen more than once.
A The El Questro Wilderness Ranch Australia

Ranch life starts promptly at daybreak at El Questro, in the north of Western Australia. It was established as a working ranch
in the 1960s, but the owner later reduced the number of cattle and developed the property as a remote holiday
destination. Although mustering cattle is not on the programme, El Questro gives more than just a glimpse into outback life.
Riding and fishing top the action, but for stressed-out city dwellers, the real attraction is the extreme isolation. Visitors stay
at one of three different places. Unless you can afford a luxury price tag, the Township is the best bet. It has air-conditioned
bungalows and tents, plus a camping ground on the riverbank. It is also the liveliest, with nightly music and entertainment
in the Swinging Arm Cafe. Swimming fills in the heat of the day, and in the evenings you can enjoy a peaceful river cruise.
The only downside is that the ranch is always full, so pre-planning is essential.
B The Lazy F Working Ranch USA
The Lazy F Working Ranch is situated on the South Texas plains about 60 miles from the city of San Antonio. The ranch puts
a real emphasis on cowboy life because it actually includes a visit to a cattle auction and a rodeo in the local town of
Gonzales. Owned by the same family since 1854, this is one of the oldest family ranches in Texas. Guests are encouraged to
join in with seasonal tasks on the ranch, and if they feel inclined to do so, they can also receive instruction in essential
cowboy skills such as roping techniques and animal feeding. For those who are feeling really adventurous, three times a
year, the Lazy F organises a challenging week-long ride on part of the old Chisholm Trail, a 19th-century link between Texas
ranches and the Pacific railhead at Abilene, in Kansas. The ranch is open to guests all year round.
C Estancia Los Potreros Argentina
Some ranches are not known for eco-principles, but Estancia Los Potreros in the hills above Cordoba in Argentina certainly
is. It uses solar and wind power to generate 90% of its electricity. The 6,000-acre cattle and horse farm is completely
organic, with livestock levels which are low enough to allow natural grasses to grow. The ranch dates back to 1574, when it
was used to breed mules for the silver mines in Peru. The ranch has been owned by the same family for the past four
generations. The horses on the ranch are Peruvian Pasos, exceptionally sure-footed when rounding up the cattle on
mountainous terrain. Guests can join in farm activities or explore the Sierras on horseback, either on a day trip or on longer
camping expeditions. Guests stay in adobe (mud and straw) buildings which have en-suite bathrooms as well as other up-to-
date facilities.
D Huechahue Northern Patagonia
Huechahue is a 15,000-acre ranch in northern Patagonia. Property of the same family for four generations, the ranch has
always been proud of its vast herds of Hereford cattle. It also offers riding and fishing holidays. Guests stay in three
bungalows with eight twin or double rooms and eat communally in the family dining room. The real highlights of this ranch
are the cattle drives, ranch-to-ranch safaris, trans-Andean expeditions and most of all, the Gaucho Games. These are
competitions on horseback for all ages, including childrens events such as an egg-and-spoon race, and there is even a
competition for riding cattle. With fifty horses, all riding abilities can be catered for. Full board, riding and fishing and
transfer costs from the airport are included in the price.
105
1. Which ranch is extremely environmentally friendly? ____________________________________
2. Which ranch has accommodation at different prices? ____________________________________
3. Which ranch gives visitors the chance to see people buying and selling animals? ________________________________
4. Which ranch is popular because it is so far from anywhere? ____________________________________
5. Which ranch offers visitors a variety of travelling experiences and competitive events? ___________________________
6. Which ranch has been in existence for several hundred years? ____________________________________
7. Which ranch provides an opportunity to go on a ride which follows a historic route? _____________________________
8. Which ranch treats guests like members of the family? ____________________________________
9. Which ranch has some nightlife for visitors to enjoy? ____________________________________
10. Which ranch asks guests to help with jobs on the ranch throughout the year? ________________________________
11. Which ranch keeps horses that are suited to steep hillsides? ____________________________________
12. Which ranch breeds only one type of cattle? ____________________________________
13. Which ranch gets fully booked well in advance? ____________________________________
14. Which ranch makes no extra charges for most of the activities on offer? ____________________________________
15. Which ranch offers traditional accommodation with modern facilities? ____________________________________

Word focus: describing holiday accommodationChoose the correct adjectives to complete the sentences. Use each word
once only. There is one extra word which you do not need.
twin, transfer, en-suite, remote, luxury, full, peaceful, up-to-date, air-conditioned
1. We had to pay ----- costs to and from the airport, but everything else was included in the price.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
2. The hotel is a very old building, but inside it has very ----- facilities.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
3. We booked a ----- room with two beds for our daughters and a double room for ourselves.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
4. Its a very hot place to visit, but its always cool inside the ----- bungalows.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
5. This year we decided to book -board accommodation and eat all our meals in the hotel.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
6. Before you book the hotel room, check that it has an ----- bathroom. I dont want to share a bathroom with other
guests!
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
7. The islands a very ----- holiday destination. Theres no airport so you can only get there by boat. The trip takes seven
hours!
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
8. We cant afford a holiday with a ----- price tag like that! Well have to go for something more basic.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
106
Word focus: compound nouns
Form compound nouns with a word from A and a word from B. Use each word once only.
There is one extra word in A and one in B which you do not need.
Write the correct compound noun below each definition. Then find these nouns in the text.
A: day (x2) high up down out live
B: side break trip stock turn lights back
1. the area of central Australia a long way from the coast or towns: 1 ___________________________________________
2. the best things about an event or activity:2___________________________________________
3. a disadvantage of doing something: 3 ___________________________________________
4. cattle and other animals: 4 ___________________________________________
5. dawn: 5___________________________________________
6. go to visit a place and come back in a single day:6 ___________________________________________
107
1 Jack had never been anywhere near the house before, and did not care to knock at the great kitchen doors for fear of
being taken for a beggar. The yards were empty. Either the horses had been taken out to work now that the ground was
softer or else which was hard to believe there were no horses at Watching. He went back to the kitchen wing and tried
knocking at a small side entrance. A man came out dressed in a black gown, and stood there peering and trembling.
2 Why dont you take your cap off to me? he asked. Jack took it off and held it behind his back, as though it belonged to
someone else. That is better. Who do you think I am?
No offence, sir, Jack replied, but you look like an old schoolmaster.
I am a schoolmaster, that is, I am tutor to this great house. If you have a question to ask, you may ask it of me. With
one foot still on the step, Jack related the story of his keepsake, his lost medal Desideratus.
Very good, said the tutor, you have told me enough.
Have you many to teach, sir, in this house? asked Jack, but the tutor half-closed his eyes and said None, none at all.
Mr Jonas has not been blessed with children. If that is so, Jack thought, this schoolmaster cant have much work to do.
3 But now, at last, here was someone with more sense; a woman who looked like a housekeeper came to see why the side
door was open and letting cold air in. What does the boy want? she asked.
He says he is in search of something that belongs to him.
You might have told him to come in then, and given him something to drink in the kitchen, she said, less out of
kindness than to put the tutor in his place.
4 Jacks whole story had to be gone through again, and then again when they got among the servants in the kitchen. Yet
really there was almost nothing to tell; the only remarkable point being that he should have seen his keepsake clearly
through almost a foot of ice. Still nothing was said as to its being found in any of the yards or ponds.
5 Suddenly, another servant came in the man who attended on the master, Mr Jonas himself. The man announced that
Mr Jonas wanted to see the boy. The other part of the house, the greater part where Mr Jonas lived, was much quieter and
grander. In the main hall, Mr Jonas himself stood with his back to the fire. Jack had never before been alone or dreamed of
being alone with such a person. What a situation, he thought, my aunt Mrs Piercy has brought me into.
6 I dare say you would rather have a sum of money, said Mr Jonas, not loudly, than whatever it is you have lost. Jack was
seized by a painful doubt. To be honest, if it was a large sum of money, he would rather have that than anything. But Mr
Jonas went on, However, you had better understand me more precisely. Come with me. And he led the way, without even
looking round to see that he was being followed.
7 Jack followed Mr Jonas up a wide staircase. Was it possible that on these dark upper floors no one else was living, no one
was sleeping? Through the tall passages, over uneven floors, Mr Jonas, walking ahead, carried a candle in its candlestick in
each hand, the flames pointing straight upwards. I am very far from home, thought Jack. Then he saw that a door was
open to the right. Am I to go in there with you, sir?
Are you afraid to go into a room? said Mr Jonas.
8 Inside it was dark, and lying on a large bed was a boy with red hair, much the same colour as Jacks own. Mr Jonas set
down his candles, went over to the bed, took the boys wrist and turned it so that the fingers opened. From the open
fingers he took Jacks medal and gave it back to him.
You have what you came for, said Mr Jonas. You have taken back what was yours.
9 Later, Jack wondered how much money Mr Jonas would in fact have offered him if he had had the sense to accept it.
Anyone who has ever been poor even if not as poor as Jack Digby will sympathise with him in this matter.
108
You are going to read a continuation of the short story in the Students Book.
For questions 18, choose the answer (A, B, C or D) which you think fits best according to the text.
1. How did Jack feel as he went towards the house?
A puzzled because there was no one about in the yards
B nervous about who might open the door if he knocked.
C surprised at seeing a man in black standing at the door
D worried that people would think he was asking for money
2. What seemed to be the schoolmasters attitude towards Jack?
A He was astonished to see someone like Jack near the house.
B He felt that Jack did not show him the respect he deserved.
C He was curious to know who Jack was and what he was doing.
D He had mistaken Jack for someone else that he had known.
3. What was Jacks attitude towards the schoolmaster?
A Jack supposed that he did not do very much teaching.
B Jack was afraid to ask him too many questions.
C Jack felt that he had been sympathetic towards him.
D Jack thought he was a sensible kind of person.
4. What does the writer mean by had to be gone through?
A had to be examined carefully
B had to be explained in detail
C had to be experienced
D had to be continued
5. How did Jack feel when he saw Mr Jonas?
A pleased to be introduced to him
B worried about how to greet him
C angry about being forced to meet him
D nervous about meeting someone like him
6. Why did Jack hesitate to reply to what Mr Jonas said to him?
A He didnt know whether to agree or not.
B He didnt understand what Mr Jonas said.
C He didnt want to disagree with Mr Jonas.
D He was too frightened to say anything.
7. How did Jack feel as he followed Mr Jonas?
A amazed at the poor condition of the upper floors
B certain that they were alone in that part of the house
C curious to know who might be living in that part of the house
D worried that the flames on the candles might go out
8. What conclusion does the writer finally come to?
A Jack could have let the boy on the bed keep the medal he was holding.
B Jack did the right thing by trying to get his aunts present back.
C Jack might have understandably regretted not accepting the money.
D Jack should have tried to find out why the boy wanted to keep the medal.
109
Have you many to teach, sir, in this house? asked Jack, but the tutor half closed his eyes and said None, none at all.
3 But now at last here was someone with more sense; a woman who looked like a housekeeper came to see why the side
grander. In the main hall Mr Jonas himself stood with his back to the fire. Jack had never before been alone or dreamed of
110
Find the phrasal verbs in the text and choose the correct meaning (A or B).
taken for 1
A taken to meet
B thought to be
taken out 2
A removed to another place
B sold
went back 3
A entered
B returned
letting ... in 4
A allowing something to enter
B making something stronger
brought ... into 5
A given to me
B created for me
set down 6
A put something down
B put something away
gave ... back 7
A took away
B returned
111
Have you many to teach, sir, in this house? asked Jack, but the tutor half closed his eyes and said None, none at all.
3 But now at last here was someone with more sense; a woman who looked like a housekeeper came to see why the side
grander. In the main hall Mr Jonas himself stood with his back to the fire. Jack had never before been alone or dreamed of
112
Reading exercise 4/3
Words connected with buildings
Find these words in the text and choose the correct meanings.
Use each meaning once only. There is one extra meaning which you do not need.
A set of stairs
All the rooms on the same level
Part attached to a larger building
The plan or layout of a building
Not tha main way into a building
A narrow corridor leading to rooms
Ground surrounded by a wall next to a building
A narrow corridor leading to rooms
Ground surrounded by a wall next to a building
A room just inside the entrance
Stair separating one level from another
1. yard (paragraph 1) ___________________________________________________

2. wing (paragraph 1) ___________________________________________________
3. side entrance (paragraph 1) ___________________________________________________
4. step (paragraph 2) ___________________________________________________
5. hall (paragraph 5) ___________________________________________________
6. staircase (paragraph 7) ___________________________________________________
7. floor (paragraph 7) ___________________________________________________
8. passage (paragraph 7) ___________________________________________________
113
Whats the fashion in tourism these days? Fish. Cities all around the world are building razzle-dazzle aquariums to show off
their fish collections and at the same time revitalise decaying neighbourhoods. 1______Genoas aquarium, built in 1922 as
the largest in the world, is the third top-paying attraction in Italy. In November 2005, a new world attraction opened with
great fanfare in Atlanta, boasting a shark tank the size of a football field. 2 ______Maybe the last aquarium you visited was
a predecessor to these new ocean super-zoos, with a few modest tanks in a gloomy cellar. 3______Using state-of-the-art
design and technology, aquariums for the 21st century recreate ecosystems from around the world and get visitors up close
to the creatures of the deep. And although its impossible to know whats going on in the brains of fish, they like many
warm-blooded zoo animals seem happy enough in their new year-round, all-weather habitats, particularly as nearly all of
them are raised in special nurseries rather than taken from the wild.
Not only are aquariums a guaranteed hit with the kids the dreamy and hypnotic water ballets presented in their tanks
have the power to charm even the most stressed-out adults. 4______Some of the best aquariums in Europe are to be found
in France, and the newest and one of the most exciting is the Cit de la Mer in Cherbourg, in the north of
France. 5______It had already received its millionth visitor by July 2006. Built around the gigantic old transatlantic maritime
terminal and opened in 2002, it is home to the pioneering deep-diving bathyscaphe Archimede, which descended into
Japans Kouriles Trench in 1961, and a uniqueAbyssal Aquarium with a spiral staircase to a simulated ocean floor. Another
attraction is the Redoubtable, the largest submarine in the world open to the public, and Frances first missile-firing
submarine. This is its rightful home, as it was built in Cherbourg.6______You should allow about three hours to see all of
the Cit de la Mers permanent features, although the building also has a large interactive educational centre and a huge
space for year-round exhibitions and events.
In Brest, western Brittany, the five-star aquarium attraction is Oceanopolis. This futuristic park opened its doors in June
1990, but underwent a major expansion in 2000, and it is now absolutely massive. 7______Each of the three areas in the
aquarium recreates a particular maritime climate temperate, tropical and polar and allows you to come eye to eye with
the creatures living within it. The fun begins at the entrance, which simulates an underwater descent into the first zone.
Here, seals play in a massive basin housing a wave machine, and there are sharks, octopuses, jellyfish and animals you can
touch. You can easily spend a full day here. As well as its marine inhabitants, the aquarium tempts you with a variety of
places to eat and fantastic views over the yacht harbour.
Missing sentences
Read the article about aquariums. Seven sentences have been removed.
Choose from the sentences AH the one which fits each gap (17).
A_____ If thats the case, then I can assure you that youre in for a big surprise.
B_____If you want a closer look, tours of the vessel take 45 minutes.
C_____So much so that it takes nearly a million gallons of seawater to support its marine residents.
D_____Many have been spectacularly successful as tourist attractions.
E_____A further dip into maritime history comes in the shape of items from a merchant cruiser from the American Civil
War, which sank off Cherbourg.
F_____And underlying these magnificent spectacles is an increased awareness of just how fragile and endangered all this
beauty is today.
G_____Not to be outdone, Dubai has announced that it will build an even bigger tank as part of the worlds largest
shopping mall.
H_____It is dedicated to humanitys undersea experience, and is more successful than its creators ever imagined.
114
their fish collections and at the same time revitalise decaying neighbourhoods. Many have been spectacularly successful as
tourist attractions. Genoas aquarium, built in 1922 as the largest in the world, is the third top-paying attraction in Italy. In
November 2005, a new world attraction opened with great fanfare in Atlanta, boasting a shark tank the size of a football
field. Not to be outdone, Dubai has announced that it will build an even bigger tank as part of the worlds largest shopping
mall.
Maybe the last aquarium you visited was a predecessor to these new ocean super-zoos, with a few modest tanks in a
gloomy cellar. If thats the case, then I can assure you that youre in for a big surprise. Using state-of-the-art design and
technology, aquariums for the 21st century recreate ecosystems from around the world and get visitors up close to the
creatures of the deep. And although its impossible to know whats going on in the brains of fish, they like many warm-
blooded zoo animals seem happy enough in their new year-round, all-weather habitats, particularly as nearly all of them
are raised in special nurseries rather than taken from the wild.
have the power to charm even the most stressed-out adults. And underlying these magnificent spectacles is an increased
awareness of just how fragile and endangered all this beauty is today. Some of the best aquariums in Europe are to be
found in France, and the newest and one of the most exciting is the Cit de la Mer in Cherbourg, in the north of France.
It is dedicated to humanitys undersea experience, and is more successful than its creators ever imagined. It had already
received its millionth visitor by July 2006. Built around the gigantic old transatlantic maritime terminal and opened in 2002,
it is home to the pioneering deep-divingbathyscaphe Archimede , which descended into Japans Kouriles Trench in 1961,
and a unique Abyssal Aquarium with a spiral staircase to a simulated ocean floor. Another attraction is the Redoubtable ,
the largest submarine in the world open to the public, and Frances first missile-firing submarine. This is its rightful home, as
it was built in Cherbourg. If you want a closer look, tours of the vessel take 45 minutes. You should allow about 3 hours to
see all of the Cit de la Mer s permanent features, although the building also has a large interactive educational centre and
a huge space for year-round exhibitions and events.
In Brest, western Brittany, the five-star aquarium attraction is Oceanopolis . This futuristic park opened its doors in June
1990, but underwent a major expansion in 2000, and it is now absolutely massive. So much so that it takes nearly a million
gallons of seawater to support its marine residents. Each of the three areas in the aquarium recreates a particular maritime
climate temperate, tropical and polar and allows you to come eye to eye with the creatures living within it. The fun
begins at the entrance, which simulates an underwater descent into the first zone. Here seals play in a massive basin
housing a wave machine, and there are sharks, octopuses, jellyfish and animals you can touch. You can easily spend a full
day here. As well as its marine inhabitants, the aquarium tempts you with a variety of places to eat and fantastic views over
the yacht harbour.
Compound adjectives
Choose the correct meaning, A or B, for these compound adjectives from the text.
1 razzle-dazzle 5 all-weather
A exciting and entertaining A in bad weather
B bright and confusing B in any kind of weather
2 top-paying 6 stressed-out
A costing the most to run A unable to relax
B making the most money B exhausted
3 state-of-the-art 7 deep-diving
A very artistic A diving off a high board
B the best and most recent B diving a long way down
4 year-round 8 five-star
A all the year A the best there is
B part of the year B five different types
115
Reading Exercise5/3
their fish collections and at the same time revitalise decaying neighbourhoods. Many have been spectacularly successful as
tourist attractions. Genoas aquarium, built in 1922 as the largest in the world, is the third top-paying attraction in Italy. In
November 2005, a new world attraction opened with great fanfare in Atlanta, boasting a shark tank the size of a football
field. Not to be outdone, Dubai has announced that it will build an even bigger tank as part of the worlds largest shopping
mall.
Maybe the last aquarium you visited was a predecessor to these new ocean super-zoos, with a few modest tanks in a
gloomy cellar. If thats the case, then I can assure you that youre in for a big surprise. Using state-of-the-art design and
technology, aquariums for the 21st century recreate ecosystems from around the world and get visitors up close to the
creatures of the deep. And although its impossible to know whats going on in the brains of fish, they like many warm-
blooded zoo animals seem happy enough in their new year-round, all-weather habitats, particularly as nearly all of them
are raised in special nurseries rather than taken from the wild.
have the power to charm even the most stressed-out adults. And underlying these magnificent spectacles is an increased
awareness of just how fragile and endangered all this beauty is today. Some of the best aquariums in Europe are to be
found in France, and the newest and one of the most exciting is the Cit de la Mer in Cherbourg, in the north of France.
It is dedicated to humanitys undersea experience, and is more successful than its creators ever imagined. It had already
received its millionth visitor by July 2006. Built around the gigantic old transatlantic maritime terminal and opened in 2002,
it is home to the pioneering deep-diving bathyscaphe Archimede , which descended into Japans Kouriles Trench in 1961,
and a unique Abyssal Aquarium with a spiral staircase to a simulated ocean floor. Another attraction is the Redoubtable ,
the largest submarine in the world open to the public, and Frances first missile-firing submarine. This is its rightful home, as
it was built in Cherbourg. If you want a closer look, tours of the vessel take 45 minutes. You should allow about 3 hours to
see all of the Cit de la Mer s permanent features, although the building also has a large interactive educational centre and
a huge space for year-round exhibitions and events.
In Brest, western Brittany, the five-star aquarium attraction is Oceanopolis . This futuristic park opened its doors in June
1990, but underwent a major expansion in 2000, and it is now absolutely massive. So much so that it takes nearly a million
gallons of seawater to support its marine residents. Each of the three areas in the aquarium recreates a particular maritime
climate temperate, tropical and polar and allows you to come eye to eye with the creatures living within it. The fun
begins at the entrance, which simulates an underwater descent into the first zone. Here seals play in a massive basin
housing a wave machine, and there are sharks, octopuses, jellyfish and animals you can touch. You can easily spend a full
day here. As well as its marine inhabitants, the aquarium tempts you with a variety of places to eat and fantastic views over
the yacht harbour.
Question
Words connected with entertainment. Choose the correct nouns from the article to match the definitions.
There is one extra word which you do not need.
collection, spectacles, a hit, experience, attraction, exhibitions, events
1. things are shown to the public at these: __________________________________________

2. a person or thing that is very popular: __________________________________________
3. things that happen or are organised in a particular place: __________________________________________
4. groups of objects or creatures: __________________________________________
5. things that are very impressive or exciting to look at: __________________________________________
6. things that are interesting or worth seeing or visiting: __________________________________________
116
A Laura Richter, middle school teacher, Maine
Our local history project began many years ago. We examined our curriculum and tried to figure out how we could engage
students in a really interesting community study. We began by trying to find out how much the kids already knew about the
local community. Before long, we were bringing in community members to meet the students, and sending students out
into the town to interview residents who were old enough to remember what life in the town used to be like. The students
started capturing what they were discovering in both video and text, and decided to create a website featuring their huge
body of historical research, photographs and documentaries. The students are now putting the finishing touches to a
historical walking tour of what used to be considered a dying industrial town, but which has now been put firmly on the
map by this dedicated group of young local historians.
B Lisa Wilde, high school teacher, New York City
For the majority of our students, this is their last chance to get a diploma. Kids come here for a variety of reasons and often
have academic gaps in their education. They alternate a week of school with a week of school-coordinated work in local
businesses, and this makes class time extremely precious because students still have to pass their final exams. That said, I
try to spend five days every semester on writing poetry. In class, we read poetry and discuss descriptive language, and then
the students write poems. Their poems are interesting often amazing and I always feel they should be shown to a larger
audience. Last spring, they got the opportunity to do just that. There was an exhibition of mounted, enlarged selected
students poems at our local library. The students read their poems at the opening, and the exhibits run was extended
twice because of the response. Having their poems in a show has been significant for the students. Its expanded their
horizons, making them feel valued. Its a testament to the value both of art and of a second chance.
C Karen Gustafson, Girls Rock N Roll Retreat, Minnesota
This summer, we ran a five-day rock camp for girls aged 1017. Every day, the girls had two instrument classes, and they met other
students in their allotted bands twice a day. While in their bands, they wrote songs both the music and the lyrics. We worked on stage
presence with the girls, which helped them to get over their nerves and build up their confidence a little bit. They also made marketing
materials for their bands. They made posters, T-shirts and album covers, and they had a lot of fun with spray paint! The last day was the
big concert, where the girls played to a sold-out house. Some people just couldnt believe that wed got the girls to play a song in a week
especially when some had never played an instrument before. A lot of mums dropping off their daughters wanted to join in too, so
were thinking of having a session for more mature would-be rock musicians next year!
D Taki Sidley, high school teacher, Virginia
My school is best known as the setting for the 2000 film Remember the Titans, in which Denzel Washington plays a tough coach who
unites a football team (and a community) divided along racial lines. Though much about the school has changed since the 1970s story in
the film, the school remains quite racially and ethnically diverse, but integrated. In 2007, a group of students in my Photography and
Documentary Studies class set out to illustrate that diversity in a 112-page, duotone book of photography. I threw out the idea to my
students about making a book, and they seemed excited about it. I had envisioned a book focused on the different ethnic aspects of the
school, but the students wanted to focus on diversity in a broader way: individuals talents and backgrounds. They searched for
classmates who had interesting stories or unique backgrounds to feature in it. Some of the photographs are really different and unusual,
and the finished work is a real, professional book of photography.
1. Which person used the schools reputation to inspire students to produce something unusual? __________________
2. Which person is certain that recognition of talent brings a sense of achievement? __________________
3. Which person showed students how to sell themselves and their talents? __________________
4. Which person has encouraged students to learn more about the past? __________________
5. Which person has to maximise the time available for academic study? __________________
6. Which person has enabled students to raise the profile of their home town? __________________
7. Which person suggested that their students work on a project highlighting their mixed backgrounds? _______________
8. Which person inspired other members of their students families to follow in their childrens footsteps? _____________
9. Which person has created an opportunity for students to use their computer skills? __________________
10. Which person allows time in the school programme for students to develop their creative abilities? _______________
11. Which person was the inspiration behind a project which was rather different from their original idea? ______________
12. Which person helped students to cope with being nervous about appearing in public? __________________
13. Which person made students more appreciative of their surroundings? __________________
14. Which person feels that there is more to education than just passing exams? __________________
15. Which person achieved unbelievable results with absolute beginners? __________________
117
Inspirational People
A Laura Richter, middle school teacher, Maine
Our local history project began many years ago. We examined our curriculum and tried to figure out how we could engage
students in a really interesting community study. We began by trying to find out how much the kids already knew about the
local community. Before long, we were bringing in community members to meet the students, and sending students out
into the town to interview residents who were old enough to remember what life in the town used to be like. The students
started capturing what they were discovering in both video and text, and decided to create a website featuring their huge
body of historical research, photographs and documentaries. The students are now putting the finishing touches to a
historical walking tour of what used to be considered a dying industrial town, but which has now been put firmly on the
map by this dedicated group of young local historians.
B Lisa Wilde, high school teacher, New York City
For the majority of our students, this is their last chance to get a diploma. Kids come here for a variety of reasons and often
have academic gaps in their education. They alternate a week of school with a week of school-coordinated work in local
businesses, and this makes class time extremely precious because students still have to pass their final exams. That said, I
try to spend five days every semester on writing poetry. In class, we read poetry and discuss descriptive language, and then
the students write poems. Their poems are interesting often amazing and I always feel they should be shown to a larger
audience. Last spring, they got the opportunity to do just that. There was an exhibition of mounted, enlarged selected
students poems at our local library. The students read their poems at the opening, and the exhibits run was extended
twice because of the response. Having their poems in a show has been significant for the students. Its expanded their
horizons, making them feel valued. Its a testament to the value both of art and of a second chance.
C Karen Gustafson, Girls Rock N Roll Retreat, Minnesota
This summer, we ran a five-day rock camp for girls aged 1017. Every day, the girls had two instrument classes, and they
met other students in their allotted bands twice a day. While in their bands, they wrote songs both the music and the
lyrics. We worked on stage presence with the girls, which helped them to get over their nerves and build up their
confidence a little bit. They also made marketing materials for their bands. They made posters, T-shirts and album covers,
and they had a lot of fun with spray paint! The last day was the big concert, where the girls played to a sold-out house.
Some people just couldnt believe that wed got the girls to play a song in a week especially when some had never played
an instrument before. A lot of mums dropping off their daughters wanted to join in too, so were thinking of having a
session for more mature would-be rock musicians next year!
D Taki Sidley, high school teacher, Virginia
My school is best known as the setting for the 2000 film Remember the Titans , in which Denzel Washington plays a tough
coach who unites a football team (and a community) divided along racial lines. Though much about the school has changed
since the 1970s story in the film, the school remains quite racially and ethnically diverse, but integrated. In 2007, a group of
students in my Photography and Documentary Studies class set out to illustrate that diversity in a 112-page, duotone book
of photography. I threw out the idea to my students about making a book, and they seemed excited about it. I had
envisioned a book focused on the different ethnic aspects of the school, but the students wanted to focus on diversity in a
broader way: individuals talents and backgrounds. They searched for classmates who had interesting stories or unique
backgrounds to feature in it. Some of the photographs are really different and unusual, and the finished work is a real,
professional book of photography.
Words and meanings -Choose the correct meaning A or B for these phrases from the text.
1. putting the finishing touches to
A looking through B completing
2. been put firmly on the map
A become known B become wealthy
3. expanded their horizons
A encouraged them to travel B widened their experience
4. get over their nerves
A become more enthusiastic B control their fear
5. ethnically diverse
A of different nationalities and cultures B from different social backgrounds
118
Phrasal verbs
Complete the sentences with the correct form of these phrasal verbs from the text.
Use each phrasal verb once only. You may need to add pronouns.
drop (someone) off join in find out build up throw out figure out get over set out
1. The history teacher 1----- a few suggestions to her students about their projects.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
2. When our teacher asked for volunteers to help build the nature garden, everyone in the class was eager to 2 ----- .
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
3. Brads trying to 3 ----- a collection of his favourite music.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
4. Could you ask the taxi driver to 4 ----- at the bus station?
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
5. I just cant 5 ----- how I should start this project, or what I should include in it.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
6. I 6 ----- lots of interesting facts about this building its got an amazing history.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
7. It took Jackie ages to 7 ----- losing her job she was really upset about it.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
8. We 8 ----- to paint one or two rooms in the house, but weve ended up painting all of the rooms!
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
119
1 For many years I have wanted to visit Cuba, though my original enthusiasm was the result of a less than intellectual
attraction. The first film I ever saw was Kiss the Boys Goodbye, starring Mary Martin. One of the tunes, Sand in my Shoes,
still echoes in my mind:
You are the moonlit memory I cant seem to lose
Thats why my lifes an endless cruise
All that is real is the feel of the sand in my shoes
Sand in my shoes, sand from Havana.
2 At ten, I had no idea of what a city that prompted moonlit memories would be like. But that description made me
believe that Havana was a more romantic place than anywhere I had ever visited. Many years on with Rome and Petra,
Paris and Hong Kong, Beirut and Reykjavik to remember that is still my view. Everything Ive heard and read confirms it.
And its not only Havana that, in the words of the song, is calling me back to that ever so heavenly shore. Ive waited too
long to go to Cuba. In November, my ambition is about to be realised.
3 Of course, Havana will be the highlight of my visit. Aside from the exotic music and the different varieties of food, the
capital calls because of its history and architecture. Five hundred years ago it was the great trading port of the Americas.
Cuba had no gold, and sugar, coffee and tobacco came 200 years later, but Havana, a superb natural harbour at the
entrance to the Gulf of Mexico, was an ideal place to assemble the treasures of the Caribbean before they went to Europe.
It became the third-largest city in the New World, bigger than Boston or New York. Its size and wealth made it irresistible to
pirates, so the merchants responded by creating a citadel. I shall be touring the citys sights, wandering among the dozens
of historical buildings that are like a lexicon of styles in Spanish-American architecture.
4 For years, Havana was where Americans went to enjoy themselves. But Fidel Castro swept all that away, leaving only the
memories from the more romantic, pre-revolution residents. Ernest Hemingway lived in Cuba; it was there that he
wrote The Old Man and the Sea, which won him the Nobel Prize. Ill go to his favourite cafs and restaurants, and hope he
was right to proclaim that for beauty, only Venice and Paris surpass Havana. Its climate is certainly more equitable the
Gulf Stream and the trade winds, and Cubas location (just south of the Tropic of Cancer) keep it temperate year round.
5 Cubas history is much stormier than its climate. George Keppel, an English earl, captured Havana for King George in 1762,
but swapped it for Florida a year later. It was part of the Spanish empire until 1898. Then the USS Maine was sunk in Havana
harbour and America invaded. When the Spaniards left, they took with them the remains of Christopher Columbus.
American domination continued until the revolution in 1959. One of the countrys fascinations is the way in which, for 50
years, it has maintained political and economic independence from its mighty neighbour.
6 The tide turned in favour of the Cuban revolutionaries at Santa Clara. It is now home to the Che Guevara Mausoleum and
Museum, a dramatic tribute to the revolutionary. Camillo, Ches son, is now project director of the Che Guevara Studies
Center in Havana. I shall meet him when my tour stops in the capital.
7 There are many sandy beaches in the country and I propose, during my 12 days there, to get to know some of them. And
that is only one of the touristy ways in which Ill be spending my time. I shall spend a day in Trinidad, designated a UNESCO
World Heritage Site because of its famous Spanish architecture; visit the Valley of the Sugar Mills; and watch a traditional
Cuban potter at work. There will be trips to the wonderfully named towns of Sancti Spiritus and Remedios. But what has
really attracted me to Cuba for so long is its turbulent history. For me, the songs dreams in the night, dreams of Havana
come true in November.
120
Read the article about Cuba.
1. What comment does the writer make about Cuba in paragraphs 1 and 2?
A He has visited more romantic places than Cuba.
B He has no idea what really attracts him to Cuba.
C He feels it is too long since he last visited Cuba.
D He is certain he will not be disappointed by Cuba.
2. Why was Havana such an important trading port 500 years ago?
A It exported sugar and coffee.
B It was in a convenient location.
C It was a trading centre for tobacco.
D It had an excellent man-made harbour.
3. The writer uses the expression a lexicon of styles to emphasise the fact that
A there are many different styles of architecture in Havana.
B there are many books about the architecture in Havana.
C the buildings in Havana were all built in the same period.
D the buildings in Havana all look attractive.
4. What does the writer say about Ernest Hemingway?
A He was attracted to Cuba by the temperate climate.
B He went to live in Cuba after hed won the Nobel Prize.
C He felt only two places in the world were better than Havana.
D He thought Havana was the most beautiful place hed seen.
5. What does the writer say about Cubas interesting history?
A After the invasion of Cuba, a US ship sank in Havana harbour.
B Cuba belonged to King George for many years in the 1700s.
C The British exchanged Cuba for Florida in the 1800s.
D Cuba was under Spanish rule until the late 1800s.
6. What does the writer plan to do in Havana?
A supervise a project on Che Guevara
B visit the Che Guevara Studies Center
C meet Che Guevaras son
D see Che Guevaras house
7. What interests the writer most about Cuba?
A towns like Sancti Spiritus and Remedios
B the countrys past
C Cuban songs and music
D the countrys coastline
121
Adjective forms
Type the correct adjective form of the word in brackets to complete the sentences about Cuba.
1. Cuba is a very ---- place. (romance)
______________________________________________________________________________________________
2. Havana has a superb ---- harbour. (nature)
______________________________________________________________________________________________
3. Because of its wealth, Cuba was ---- to pirates. (resist)
______________________________________________________________________________________________
4. There are many ----- buildings in Cuba. (history)
______________________________________________________________________________________________
5. Trinidad is ----- for its Spanish architecture. (fame)
______________________________________________________________________________________________
6. You can still visit some of Hemingways ----- cafs and restaurants. (favour)
______________________________________________________________________________________________
7. Cuba has kept its ---- independence for fifty years. (politics)
______________________________________________________________________________________________
8. Although Cuba is not a great ---- power, it makes a lot of money out of tourism. (economy)
______________________________________________________________________________________________

Verbs and meanings
Find the verbs in italics in the text and choose the correct meanings, A or B.
Type A or B in the box for each one.
1 prompted: ____________________________________ A caused B reminded
2 confirms: ____________________________________ A accepts it B shows it is true
3 realised:____________________________________ A made true B made aware of
4 responded: ____________________________________ A replied B reacted
5 proclaim: ____________________________________ A publicly say or write B recommend
6 assemble:____________________________________ A bring things together in one place B build something
7 propose:____________________________________ A suggest B intend
122
1 For many years I have wanted to visit Cuba, though my original enthusiasm was the result of a less than intellectual
attraction. The first film I ever saw was Kiss the Boys Goodbye , starring Mary Martin. One of the tunes, Sand in my Shoes ,
still echoes in my mind:
You are the moonlit memory I cant seem to lose
Thats why my lifes an endless cruise
All that is real is the feel of the sand in my shoes
Sand in my shoes, sand from Havana.
2 At ten, I had no idea of what a city that prompted 'moonlit memories would be like. But that description made me
believe that Havana was a more romantic place than anywhere I had ever visited. Many years on with Rome and Petra,
Paris and Hong Kong, Beirut and Reykjavik to remember that is still my view. Everything Ive heard and read confirms it.
And its not only Havana that, in the words of the song, is calling me back to that ever so heavenly shore. Ive waited too
long to go to Cuba. In November, my ambition is about to be realised.
3 Of course, Havana will be the highlight of my visit. Aside from the exotic music and the different varieties of food, the
capital calls because of its history and architecture. Five hundred years ago it was the great trading port of the Americas.
Cuba had no gold, and sugar, coffee and tobacco came 200 years later, but Havana, a superb natural harbour at the
entrance to the Gulf of Mexico, was an ideal place to assemble the treasures of the Caribbean before they went to Europe.
It became the third-largest city in the New World, bigger than Boston or New York. Its size and wealth made it irresistible to
pirates, so the merchants responded by creating a citadel. I shall be touring the citys sights, wandering among the dozens
of historical buildings that are like a lexicon of styles in Spanish-American architecture.
4 For years, Havana was where Americans went to enjoy themselves. But Fidel Castro swept all that away, leaving only the
memories from the more romantic, pre-revolution residents. Ernest Hemingway lived in Cuba; it was there that he
wrote The Old Man and the Sea , which won him the Nobel Prize. Ill go to his favourite cafs and restaurants, and hope he
was right to proclaim that for beauty, only Venice and Paris surpass Havana. Its climate is certainly more equitable the
Gulf Stream and the trade winds, and Cubas location (just south of the Tropic of Cancer) keep it temperate year round.
5 Cubas history is much stormier than its climate. George Keppel, an English earl, captured Havana for King George in 1762,
but swapped it for Florida a year later. It was part of the Spanish empire until 1898. Then the USS Maine was sunk in Havana
harbour and America invaded. When the Spaniards left, they took with them the remains of Christopher Columbus.
American domination continued until the revolution in 1959. One of the countrys fascinations is the way in which, for 50
years, it has maintained political and economic independence from its mighty neighbour.
6 The tide turned in favour of the Cuban revolutionaries at Santa Clara. It is now home to the Che Guevara Mausoleum and
Museum, a dramatic tribute to the revolutionary. Camillo, Ches son, is now project director of the Che Guevara Studies
Center in Havana. I shall meet him when my tour stops in the capital.
7 There are many sandy beaches in the country and I propose, during my 12 days there, to get to know some of them. And
that is only one of the touristy ways in which Ill be spending my time. I shall spend a day in Trinidad, designated a UNESCO
World Heritage Site because of its famous Spanish architecture; visit the Valley of the Sugar Mills; and watch a traditional
Cuban potter at work. There will be trips to the wonderfully named towns of Sancti Spiritus and Remedios. But what has
really attracted me to Cuba for so long is its turbulent history. For me, the songs dreams in the night, dreams of Havana
come true in November.
123
Verbs and meanings 7/3
Type the correct form of these verbs from the text to complete the sentences.
proclaim respond propose prompt confirm realise assemble

a) His ambition to become a great climber was 1 ------ when he reached the top of Mount Everest.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
b) I 2 ------ that we do not discuss this matter today, but leave it until our next meeting.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
c) If you want to pay for the tickets by credit card, you need to 3 ------ your name, address and card details.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
d) The city has been 4 ------ one of the most fascinating places in the world.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
e) What on earth 5 ------ James to make a silly comment like that?
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
f) It will be interesting to see how the government 6 ------ to our campaign for a traffic-free city centre.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
g) Ive 7 ------ all the things I want to take on holiday, so now I can start putting them in my suitcase.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
124
The sun rose like a pearl into a pale blue sky, and full of optimism, I leapt out of bed. At eight on the dot, I collected my
weighty pile of damp clothes from the cleaners.
1 I packed, breakfasted, then made a fatal error. With my rucksack on my back, I left the room. I closed the
door, then remembered that I had forgotten to look under the bed, a habit I had adopted since losing a book in France.
Without thinking to remove my rucksack, I went back in, bent down and felt something snap in my back. 2
I said goodbye to my kind hosts, then walked the short distance to the T-junction where the path to Pastorello branches off
along a hillside. And here, the rest of my journey became extremely difficult. Walking uphill activated different muscles, and
a sudden sharp pain in my back caused me, instinctively, to fling off my rucksack. 3 I struggled to rise, and
when I finally got to my feet I could already feel my muscles seizing up.
If past experience was anything to go by, then it seemed likely that I would be out of action for several days, but before that
happened, I had to return to the inn. Should I leave my rucksack by the road? No, I decided. 4 Suddenly, it was
twice as heavy.
Normal strides were impossible, and using a piece of wood to help me walk, I made my way slowly back to the inn, whose
steps I could not climb. I let my pack fall and, leaving it outside, I crept into the bar. The innkeeper and his wife, full of
sympathy, gave me coffee while I sat on a hard-backed chair wondering what to do. A boy fetched my rucksack and I
swallowed some painkillers.5 After that, the painkillers started working and I could actually move a bit better,
so I decided to take a bus to a small town in the next valley, from which, should my condition worsen, I would go north to
Parma.
But when I enquired, I learned that there were no bus routes across the hills. 6 It was only sixteen kilometres,
and the day after that, if it was possible, I would walk to my next destination.
The innkeeper lifted the rucksack onto my shoulders, and I took over twenty minutes to cover the 500 metres separating
me from the road junction. I stood under a tree for six hot hours, during which time only six cars passed. 7 At
3.30, despairing of ever leaving, I adopted plan three. I lifted my rucksack and started to walk my original route.
Missing sentences
Read the article written by a backpacker in Italy. Seven sentences have been removed from the article.
Choose from the sentences AH the one which fits each gap (17).
A. But I had forgotten my waist-strap and the weight pulled me down to the grass verge, where I fell in a heap.
B. Sitting still with an L-shaped back was not sensible, so I spent half an hour hobbling round the bar.
C. Without batting an eyelid, the manageress charged me 33 Euros; but cellophane wrapping for my three shirts was
included so I did not argue.
D. Three stopped, but they were only going a kilometre and, not wishing to be stranded in the middle of nowhere, I turned
them down.
E. Its loss would complicate matters considerably, and so I lifted it, carefully, onto my shoulders.
F. I straightened up and everything seemed fine, apart from a slight pain where my vertebrae turned into hips.
G. It took me an hour to reach the bus station, but the bus was late, and when it arrived, I had to sit with my pack on my
lap.
H. So I decided on plan two, which meant that I would hitchhike.
125
The sun rose like a pearl into a pale blue sky, and full of optimism, I leapt out of bed. At eight on the dot, I collected my
weighty pile of damp clothes from the cleaners.
I packed, breakfasted, then made a fatal error. With my rucksack on my back, I left the room. I closed the door, then
remembered that I had forgotten to look under the bed, a habit I had adopted since losing a book in France. Without
thinking to remove my rucksack, I went back in, bent down and felt something snap in my back.
I said goodbye to my kind hosts, then walked the short distance to the T-junction where the path to Pastorello branches off
along a hillside. And here, the rest of my journey became extremely difficult. Walking uphill activated different muscles, and
a sudden sharp pain in my back caused me, instinctively, to fling off my rucksack. I struggled to rise, and when I finally got
to my feet I could already feel my muscles were starting to seize up.
If past experience was anything to go by, then it seemed likely that I would be out of action for several days, but before that
happened, I had to return to the inn. Should I leave my rucksack by the road? No, I decided. Suddenly, it was twice as heavy.
Normal strides were impossible, and using a piece of wood to help me walk, I made my way slowly back to the inn, whose
steps I could not climb. I let my pack fall and, leaving it outside, I crept into the bar. The innkeeper and his wife, full
of sympathy, gave me coffee while I sat on a hard-backed chair wondering what to do. A boy fetched my rucksack and I
swallowed some painkillers. After that, the painkillers started working and I could actually move a bit better, so I decided to
take a bus to a small town in the next valley, from which, should my condition worsen, I would go north to Parma.
But when I enquired, I learned that there were no bus routes across the hills. It was only sixteen kilometres, and the day
after that, if it was possible, I would walk to my next destination.
The innkeeper lifted the rucksack onto my shoulders, and I took over twenty minutes to cover the 500 metres separating
me from the road junction. I stood under a tree for six hot hours, during which time only six cars passed. At 3.30, despairing
of ever leaving, I adopted plan three. I lifted my rucksack and started to walk my original route.
Reading Exercise 8/2 Verbs and meanings
Choose the correct word from the text to match each meaning in 1-8. There is one extra word you don't need.
optimism, sympathy, rise, damp, habit, instinctively, fatal, seize up, strides
1 ____________________________ : slightly wet
2 ____________________________: lift or increase
3 ____________________________: walking with big steps
4 ____________________________: being positive about things
5 ____________________________: something one does regularly
6 ____________________________: reacting naturally
7 ____________________________: can end in disaster
8 ____________________________: unable to move
9 ____________________________: kindness and understanding
126
10 UNIT 8 READING Exercise 8/3
Easily confused words
Type the correct form of the words in bold to complete the sentences.
rise / raise
What time does the sun 1------ in the morning?
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
Please 2 ------ your hand if you would like to go on the class outing.
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
damp / humid
You cant wear that shirt its still 3 ------ .
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
The weather will be very hot and 4 ------ tomorrow.
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
fall / drop
Please dont 5 ------ that vase its worth a lot of money.
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
The price of electricity 6 ------ last month.
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
sympathy / kindness
When I told my friends why I was late, they were very 7 ------ about it.
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
Its very 8 ------ of you to offer to look after our dog while were away on holiday.
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
sensible / sensitive
Tom is a very 9 ------ person its easy to upset him.
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
Its 10 ------ to take a photocopy of your passport to carry round with you on holiday.
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
argue / discuss
We 11 ------ the matter at the next meeting and made a decision.
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
I dont like to 12 ------ with people.
127
A Ted Marshall (17)

I live in a fairly quiet part of town and my friend Polly lives just across the road from me. Weve known each other for years
and most of the time were best mates well go everywhere and do everything together. But there are times when she can
be really awkward. Sometimes Im convinced that she says things just to wind me up, and we end up falling out with each
other. She has this really irritating habit of saying shes coming round for a chat, then ringing up at the last minute to say
shes changed her mind. Now, Im an incredibly well-organised and, I hope, quite dependable sort of person, and when I say
Ill do something, I do it. So in many ways, its surprising that Polly and I are still so close after all this time. But thats the
thing about friendship. You have to make allowances and tolerate things you wouldnt normally be happy about otherwise
you wouldnt be real friends.
B Sarah Newgent (25)
I started a new job about a year ago and I didnt like it much at first. Most of the other people working there seemed quite a
bit older than me. But one day I met this really bright guy called Bill. I have no idea why I didnt notice him at first because
were in the same section of the office. Funnily enough, although the office isnt always that busy, we tend not to speak to
each other much during working hours. Thats the way I prefer it, actually. I dont like everyone knowing who Im friendly
with. But once were out of the office, we see each other all the time. Hes a really nice fellow in fact, I dont think weve
once had an argument about anything. And hes one of those people youd have complete faith in, no matter what
happened. Naturally, I dont go to him with every little problem I have, but I know that if there was a crisis, I could always
turn to him for help. I have a very small circle of friends, so Bills very special.
C Sue Dickens (19)
My friends are very important to me, but the person I really have a great relationship with is my grandmother. Theres
always been this connection between us ever since I can remember. I know that some people think the older generations
a bit stuffy and out of touch, but they havent met my grandmother. She has masses of knowledge and experience, and
shes passed such a lot on to me and its not the kinds of things you might find by reading books. She has this fantastic
sense of humour too. She never really takes anything too seriously, and shes never moody, so shes the person I always go
to when Im feeling a bit low and need cheering up. I suppose our relationship might seem a little unusual in many respects,
but Ive never felt that there was any generation gap between us because shes so young at heart. One day I might have
grandchildren of my own, and Id really like to be the sort of grandmother shes been to me.
D Will Bradshaw (26)
Kevin and I go back a long way. We actually went to school together, but I dont think thats got anything to do with our
friendship. Its more to do with the fact that were both football fanatics and we go to matches together at least once a
week. We actually support the same team, and we travel all over the country to watch them play not that they always
win, but they try hard! Amazingly, were a bit like two peas in a pod we have the same likes and dislikes clothes, food,
films, that kind of thing. It makes life easy when youre trying to decide where to go and what to do, or what to buy. When
youve known each other for such a long time, you can usually predict what somebodys going to say next, and how theyll
react to a certain situation. Now I know that some people might say that being predictable is just boring, but I think its
great. Its a bit like having a twin brother, only ten times better.
128
Multiple matching
You are going to read a magazine article about people and relationships.
For questions 115, choose from the people (AD). The people may be chosen more than once.
1. Which person relies on someone in particular to make them feel better?
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
2. Which person has a friend who reflects their own personality and tastes?
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
3. Which person cannot remember having any kind of argument with their friend?
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
4. Which person would like to be more like someone whose qualities they really admire?
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
5. Which person had the same type of education as their friend?
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
6. Which person has a friendship which has its ups and downs?
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
7. Which person would ask their friend for advice if there was a serious problem?
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
8. Which person is amazed their friendship has lasted so long?
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
9. Which person usually knows how their friend will behave?
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
10. Which person feels that friendship is all about putting up with one another?
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
11. Which person would rather keep personal relationships private?
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
12. Which person has a relationship which has taught them a lot?
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
13. Which person thinks their friend sometimes deliberately tries to annoy them?
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
14. Which person would trust their friend with anything?
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
15. Which person feels that age is no barrier to friendship?
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
129
Expressions connected with friendship
Find these expressions in the text and choose the correct meanings.
Use each expression once only. There is one expression you do not need to use.
not see the funny side of things,

decide to ignore someones faults
have been friends for ages
make someone feel happier
try to make someone angry
guess what someone will do
ask someones advice
be really good friends
trust absolutely
put up with something
always do something thats annoying
1. be best mates: ____________________________________________________
2. wind someone up: ____________________________________________________
3. have a habit of (doing something): ____________________________________________________
4. make allowances for (someone or something): ____________________________________________________
5. tolerate (someone or something): ____________________________________________________
6. have complete faith in someone: ____________________________________________________
7. turn to (someone) for help: ____________________________________________________
8. take things too seriously: ____________________________________________________
9. cheer (someone) up: ____________________________________________________
10. go back a long way: ____________________________________________________
130
A Ted Marshall (17)
I live in a fairly quiet part of town and my friend Polly lives just across the road from me. Weve known each other for years
and most of the time were best mates well go everywhere and do everything together. But there are times when she can
be reallyawkward. Sometimes Im convinced that she says things just to wind me up, and we end up falling out with each
other. She has this really irritating habit of saying shes coming round for a chat, then ringing up at the last minute to say
shes changed her mind. Now, Im an incredibly well-organised and, I hope, quite dependable sort of person, and when I
say Ill do something, I do it. So in many ways, its surprising that Polly and I are still so close after all this time. But thats the
thing about friendship. You have to make allowances and tolerate things you wouldnt normally be happy about otherwise
you wouldnt be real friends.
B Sarah Newgent (25)
I started a new job about a year ago and I didnt like it much at first. Most of the other people working there seemed quite a
bit older than me. But one day I met this really bright person called Bill. I have no idea why I didnt notice him at first
because were in the same section of the office. Funnily enough, although the office isnt always that busy, we tend not to
speak to each other much during working hours. Thats the way I prefer it, actually. I dont like everyone knowing who Im
friendly with. But once were out of the office, we see each other all the time. Hes a really nice fellow in fact, I dont think
weve once had an argument about anything. And hes one of those people youd have complete faith in, no matter what
happened. Naturally, I dont go to him with every little problem I have, but I know that if there was a crisis, I could always
turn to him for help. I have a very small circle of friends, so Bills very special.
C Sue Dickens (19)
My friends are very important to me, but the person I really have a great relationship with is my grandmother. Theres
always been this connection between us ever since I can remember. I know that some people think the older generations
a bit stuffy and out of touch, but they havent met my grandmother. She has masses of knowledge and experience, and
shes passed such a lot on to me and its not the kinds of things you might find by reading books. She has this fantastic
sense of humour too. She never really takes anything too seriously, and shes never moody, so shes the person I always go
to when Im feeling a bit low and need cheering up. I suppose our relationship might seem a little unusual in many respects,
but Ive never felt that there was any generation gap between us because shes so young at heart. One day I might have
grandchildren of my own, and Id really like to be the sort of grandmother shes been to me.
D Will Bradshaw (26)
Kevin and I go back a long way. We actually went to school together, but I dont think thats got anything to do with our friendship. Its
more to do with the fact that were both football fanatics and we go to matches together at least once a week. We actually support the
same team, and we travel all over the country to watch them play not that they always win, but they try hard! Amazingly, were a bit
like two peas in a pod we have the same likes and dislikes clothes, food, films, that kind of thing. It makes life easy when youre
trying to decide where to go and what to do, or what to buy. When youve known each other for such a long time, you can usually
predict what somebodys going to say next and how theyll react to a certain situation. Now I know that some people might say that
being predictable is boring, but I think its great. Its a bit like having a twin brother, only ten times better.
Adjectives describing personality - Choose a word from the text to match each meaning in 1-8.
Use each word only once. There is one adjective you do not need to use.
awkward, well-organized, dependable, bright, stuffy, irritating, young at heart, moody, predictable
1. not having the personality of an older person: ____________________________________________________
2. doing nothing unexpected: ____________________________________________________
3. clever: ____________________________________________________
4. difficult or clumsy: ____________________________________________________
5. be happy one minute and sad the next: ____________________________________________________
6. having everything in order: ____________________________________________________
7. reliable: ____________________________________________________
8. boring and uninteresting: ____________________________________________________
131
1 Now that the little gold cup has left the shoebox under his bed and is heading for a new home, John Webber rather wishes
he hadnt taken shots at it with his air gun even though the dents did flatten out nicely with the back of a spoon.
2 If scientific tests and expert opinion are correct, his grandfathers gift must represent the best scrap metal find ever. The
mystery object may be priceless genuine lost treasure; a unique piece beaten out of a single sheet of gold in the Middle
East, somewhere in the vast empire which spread from Persia to become the largest empire of the ancient world, until
overthrown by Alexander the Great in 330 BC. The skill of the Persian empires metalworkers, who made exquisite objects
in sheet gold and silver, was renowned.
3 Webber, 70, was given the cup by his grandfather William Sparks, a scrap metal dealer, before his death in 1945. Grandad
had a very good eye. He was always picking up all sorts of things everywhere he went, recalled Webber. Goodness knows
where he got this; he never said. People used to call in to see him on the way home and sell him stuff if they were hard up,
usually their gold watches. Webber was first lent the cup to play with as a child. He assumed that the odd little cup, about
13 centimetres high with the heads of two women looking in opposite directions, their foreheads decorated with knotted
snakes, was made of brass, which his grandfather had in large quantities.
4 It was only when he was packing up to move house last year that he wondered again about it, and called in a researcher,
who sent it for testing on the advice of the British Museum. The scientific report suggested that the gold was ancient, and
from the Middle East. Webber now wonders if his grandfather had some idea what it was. I think he must have known it
was gold, but he used to send a lot of the gold he got to someone else in the family who was a jeweller so the cup might
easily have been melted down. But for some reason, he held onto it.
5 The cup was sold at a small auction house. Webber decided to sell it because he has six grandchildren he would like to
help financially. At first, he couldnt make up his mind whether he could bear to go to the auction himself or not, but
eventually decided he needed to find out what the cup was really worth.
6 In the end, it took less than two minutes to end the fairytale of the shoebox treasure. The gold cup sold for 50,000, the
auctioneers lowest estimate and far less than the original speculation of its value of 500,000, to a mystery buyer standing
at the back of the auction room. He apparently wanted to add the cup to his family collection. The catalogue, and the
scientific report on which it was based, was full of words like probably, suggested and appears to be, which made it
extraordinarily difficult to say definitely what it was.
7 Webber had secretly hoped that the cup might go to a museum in Iran, and that he might get the chance to deliver it
himself. Never mind she has a new home now, and good luck to her. And I have money to give to my grandchildren, said
Webber.
132
Read the article about a scrap metal dealer who left his grandson an unusual treasure.
1 What does John Webber regret?
A keeping the gold cup in a shoebox for so long
B having to send the gold cup to the auction room
C removing the dents in the gold cup with a spoon
D using the gold cup as target practice for his air gun
2 What comment does the writer make about the gold cup?
A It was probably made during the time of Alexander the Great.
B It is probably the best surviving example of Persian metalwork.
C The workers who probably made it were famous for their skills.
D There are probably many others like it elsewhere in the world.
3 The writer uses the expression had a very good eye to explain that Webbers grandfather
A had always had excellent eyesight.
B knew a bargain when he saw one.
C had one good eye and one bad eye.
D watched everything with interest.
4 How did Webber think his grandfather might have come into possession of the cup?
A by exchanging it for a gold watch belonging to a customer
B by buying it from someone who needed money
C by coming across it somewhere by chance one day
D by visiting the house of someone who needed money
5 Webber suggests that his grandfather
A had a suspicion that the cup was valuable.
B had no idea that the cup was made of gold.
C had wanted to send the cup to be tested.
D had sent the cup to a family jeweller.
6 How did Webber feel about the auction?
A He would have preferred not to have the cup auctioned.
B He was reluctant to attend the auction himself.
C He was afraid that no one would want to buy the cup.
D He couldnt wait to find out what the cup would sell for.
7 What comment does the writer make about the auction?
A The cup made much more money than had originally been expected.
B The lack of knowledge about the cup had an effect on the selling price.
C No one was prepared to buy a cup that had such an uncertain history.
D An unknown buyer purchased the cup for a collection in a national museum.
8 How does Webber feel about what has happened to the cup?
A disappointed it has not made more money
B sad it is going back to where it came from
C delighted it is being handed back to its owner
D hopeful it will be looked after
133
1 Now that the little gold cup has left the shoebox under his bed and is heading for a new home, John Webber rather wishes
he hadnt taken shots at it with his air gun even though the dents did flatten out nicely with the back of a spoon.
2 If scientific tests and expert opinion are correct, his grandfathers gift must represent the best scrap metal find ever. The
mystery object may be priceless genuine lost treasure; a unique piece beaten out of a single sheet of gold in the Middle
East, somewhere in the vast empire which spread from Persia to become the largest empire of the ancient world, until
overthrown by Alexander the Great in 330 BC. The skill of the Persian empires metalworkers, who made exquisite objects
in sheet gold and silver, was renowned.
3 Webber, 70, was given the cup by his grandfather William Sparks, a scrap metal dealer, before his death in 1945. Grandad
had a very good eye. He was always picking up all sorts of things everywhere he went, recalled Webber. Goodness knows
where he got this; he never said. People used to call in to see him on the way home and sell him stuff if they were hard up,
usually their gold watches. Webber was first lent the cup to play with as a child. He assumed that the odd little cup, about
13 centimetres high with the heads of two women looking in opposite directions, their foreheads decorated with knotted
snakes, was made of brass, which his grandfather had in large quantities.
4 It was only when he was packing up to move house last year that he wondered again about it, and called in a researcher,
who sent it for testing on the advice of the British Museum. The scientific report suggested that the gold was ancient, and
from the Middle East. Webber now wonders if his grandfather had some idea what it was. I think he must have known it
was gold, but he used to send a lot of the gold he got to someone else in the family who was a jeweller so the cup might
easily have been melted down. But for some reason, he held onto it.
5 The cup was sold at a small auction house. Webber decided to sell it because he has six grandchildren he would like to
help financially. At first, he couldnt make up his mind whether he could bear to go to the auction himself or not, but
eventually decided he needed to find out what the cup was really worth.
6 In the end, it took less than two minutes to end the fairytale of the shoebox treasure. The gold cup sold for 50,000, the
auctioneers lowest estimate and far less than the original speculation of its value of 500,000, to a mystery buyer standing
at the back of the auction room. He apparently wanted to add the cup to his family collection. The catalogue and the
scientific report on which it was based was full of words like probably, suggested and appears to be, which made it
extraordinarily difficult to say definitely what it was.
7 Webber had secretly hoped that the cup might go to a museum in Iran, and that he might get the chance to deliver it
himself. Never mind she has a new home now, and good luck to her. And I have money to give to my grandchildren, said
Webber.
Words connected with money and wealth Choose the correct meaning, A or B, for these words and phrases from the
text.
1 genuine: _________________________________
A trustworthy B real
2 treasure: _________________________________
A something you like very much B something worth a fortune
3 exquisite: _________________________________
A beautifully made B unusual and pleasing
4 be hard up: _________________________________
A find it difficult to make money B be short of money
5 what (something) is worth: _________________________________
A its true value B its estimated value
6 estimate: _________________________________
A possible value B real value
134
Phrasal verbs
Complete the second sentence so that it has a similar meaning to the first sentence, using one of the phrasal verbs from
the text. Use each phrasal verb once only.
head for, call in, pack up, melt down, hold onto
1. 1If you have time, come and see me for a cup of coffee on your way home.
If you have time, ------ for a cup of coffee on your way home.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
2. Some people like to keep things that remind them of their childhood.
Some people like ------ things that remind them of their childhood.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
3. If you go in the direction of the station, youll find the post office.
If you ------ the station, youll find the post office.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
4. If youre hard up, you could always have some of your jewellery reduced to its original form and sell it.
If youre hard up, you could always ------ some of your jewellery and sell it.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
5. I hate having to get ready to leave at the end of a holiday.
I hate having to ------ at the end of a holiday.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
135
Key Word
Transformations
136
Key Word Transformations Exercise 1
Complete the second sentence so that it has a similar meaning to the first sentence, using the word given.
Do not change the word given. You must use between two and five words, including the word given.
1. We must take as much advantage as possible of any opportunity to speak English. MOST
We have ------- any opportunity to speak English.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
2. Honestly, I dont mind where we go for our summer holidays. MATTER
Honestly, ------- me where we go for our summer holidays.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
3. Could you speak English when you were younger? ABLE
When you were younger, ------- speak English?
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
4. Whats the answer to sixteen minus eight? AWAY
If you ------- sixteen, whats the answer?
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
5. Three hundred students entered the swimming competition last year. PART
Three hundred students ------- the swimming competition last year.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
6. The students will finish their English course at the end of June. HAVE
The English course ------- the beginning of July.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
7. There will be no more oil available in this area in 2030. RUN
Oil supplies in this area ------- by the year 2031.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
8. My sister doesnt like computer games very much. KEEN
My sister ------- computer games.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
9. Did you eat the chocolates? Maria said to Peter. ASKED
Maria ------- eaten the chocolates.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
10. Bob hadnt seen his uncle for several years. GONE
After several years ------- , Bob saw his uncle again.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
137
1. I needed a cup of coffee this morning but I didnt have time for one. DONE
I ------- a cup of coffee this morning but I didnt have time for one.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
2. Im not going to tolerate this untidiness any longer. UP
I have no intention ------- this untidiness any longer.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
3. We went for a walk although it was raining yesterday. SPITE
We went for a walk ------- yesterday.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
4. Im sure it will be raining tomorrow. BOUND
It ------- raining tomorrow.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
5. Could I borrow some change for the telephone? LEND
Could ------- some change for the telephone?
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
6. Its ages since my sister and I had an argument. OUT
My sister and I ------- ages.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
7. We are friends although we have disagreements about some things. DESPITE
We are friends ------- disagree about some things.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
8. Has John caught a cold? DOWN
Can you tell me if ------- with a cold?
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
9. I was really bored by the film last night. FOUND
I ------- last night.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
10. I think its time the children went to bed now. HAD
I think the children ------- to bed now.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
138
1. The problem we were faced with was a serious one. CAME
The problem we------- was a serious one.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
2. It was a mistake for me not to apply for the job. WISH
I------- for the job.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
3. Being rich has no connection with being happy. NOTHING
Being rich------- being happy.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
4. I cant wait to see the sights in London. FORWARD
I am -------the sights in London.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
5. The tourist trade is much better now than it was last month. PICKED
The tourist trade ------- noticeably since last month.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
6. Governments should preserve all the worlds languages. OUGHT
All the worlds languages ------- governments.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
7. The tennis players match is still going on. FINISHED
The tennis players ------- yet.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
8. What time does your plane land tomorrow? WHEN
Can you tell------- tomorrow?
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
9. The family always spent their holidays climbing in the mountains. USED
The familys holidays ------- climbing in the mountains.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
10. Physical exercise wont hurt you if you are careful. DO
Physical exercise wont-------if you are careful.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
139
1. How does a rock climber differ from a mountaineer? BETWEEN

What ------- a rock climber and a mountaineer?
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
2. This new dining table is bigger than the one we had before. NOT
The dining table we had before ------- this new one.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
3. It was not a good idea for you to refuse the offer of that job. DOWN
You should ------- the offer of that job.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
4. My teacher suggested that I spent the summer in England. ADVISED
My teacher ------- the summer in England.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
5. The film is not as interesting as the novel was. MUCH
The novel ------- the film.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
6. Will your neighbours look after your dog when you go away? TAKE
Do you know if your neighbours------- your dog when you go away?
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
7. Tom, wouldnt it be a good idea to take the students swimming tomorrow? HOW
Tom, ------- the students swimming tomorrow?
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
8. Miss Jones first came to teach us a month ago. FOR
Miss Jones ------- a month now.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
9. We are noticing a rise in the cost of living again. APPEARS
The cost of living ------- again.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
10. While we were going home, we had an accident. WAY
We ------- home when we had an accident.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
140
You must use between two and five words, including the word given.
1. Im worried about that bruise on your hand. LOOK
I dont ------- that bruise on your hand.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
2. Susan has had no success with her plans to work abroad, unfortunately. THROUGH
Susans plans to work abroad ------- , unfortunately.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
3. Dont forget to phone tomorrow, said my mother. TOLD
My mother ------- to phone the next day.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
4. Did anyone notice anything unusual? asked the police officer. IF
The police officer wanted to ------- anything unusual.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
5. Whatever you do, dont lift that heavy suitcase. UP
Id advise you not ------- that heavy suitcase.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
6. Maybe John has not remembered about tonights party. COULD
I suppose John ------- about tonights party.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
7. You should not think that the accident was your fault. BLAME
It would be wrong ------- for the accident.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
8. I am sure Maria finds reading interesting because she has lots of books. MUST
Maria ------- reading because she has lots of books.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
9. I hope you were not discouraged by Sandra from going to the concert. PUT
I hope Sandra------- going to the concert.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
10. I have been to this restaurant three times now. TIME
This ------- I have been to this restaurant now.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
141
1. I. am so exhausted that I wont be able to go out tonight. TOO

I ------- go out tonight.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
2. The runners had a difficult time competing in the race. PART
The runners who ------- the race had a difficult time.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
3. Do you know when the competition is being held next year? PLACE
When ------- next year?
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
4 . It will be necessary to send this letter first class. HAVE
This letter------- first class.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
5. Are you waiting to be served? said the waitress to me. ASKED
The waitress ------- waiting to be served.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
6. Buying those jeans was not a sensible thing for me to do yesterday. ONLY
If ------- those jeans yesterday.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
7.The owner established the company in 2001. UP
The company ------- the owner in 2001.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
8. We booked seats but it was not necessary because there was plenty of room. BOOKED
We ------- seats because there was plenty of room.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
9. It is difficult for Paul to decide what to do. MIND
Paul finds it difficult ------- what to do.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
10. Bad weather delayed the building project for several weeks. SET
The building project ------- for several weeks by the bad weather.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
142
1. Sara cleaned every bit of her room before her cousin came to stay. TOP
Sara cleaned her room ------- before her cousin came to stay.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
2. Travelling by bus is cheaper than travelling by train. MORE
Travelling by train ------- travelling by bus.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
3. Leaving school made me realise that my childhood was over. BROUGHT
Leaving school------- me that my childhood was over.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
4. I never find time to tidy my desk. ROUND
I never ------- my desk.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
143
1.The boats began to move slowly out of the harbour. WAY
The boats slowly ------- out of the harbour.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
2.One runner did not succeed in finishing the race. ABLE
One runner ------- the race.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
3.It is not my fault that the glass broke. BLAME
You cannot------- the glass.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
4.I am starting to find watching television boring. FED
I am beginning to get ------- television.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
5.Bad weather makes me feel really unhappy in the winter. DOWN
Bad weather------- in the winter.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
6.Fog delayed my flight to Moscow this morning. UP
My flight to Moscow------- this morning.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
7.Help was urgently needed in the flooded area of the country. NEED
They were------- in the flooded area of the country.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
8.I went to Italy with the intention of learning Italian. THAT
I went to Italy ------- Italian.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
9.Remember to return the videos you have rented. BACK
Dont ------- the videos you have rented.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
10.While we were going home yesterday we got caught in a thunderstorm. WAY
We got caught in a thunderstorm while we were------- yesterday.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
144
1.Has Mary altered her decision about moving to the countryside? MIND
Do you know if Mary ------- about moving to the countryside?
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
2.Id like Kevin to stop telling me what to do! WISH
I------- telling me what to do!
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
3.'Are you pleased its nearly half-term? the teacher asked us. KNOW
The teacher wanted------- pleased it was nearly half-term.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
4.We are earning less than we are spending, Im afraid. EXPENDITURE
Our------- our income, Im afraid.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
5.I dont think having luxuries in life is necessary. NECESSITY
I dont having luxuries in life.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
6.I dont earn anything like the amount I did before. NOWHERE
I earn ------- as I did before.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
7.The date for the Barcelona Conference is the 23rd of March. PLACE
The Barcelona Conference the 23rd of March.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
8.The house was not very attractive in appearance when we first saw it. MUCH
The house was------- at when we first saw it.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
9.Nobody wants to buy this type of music any more. LONGER
There ------- for this type of music.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
10.Looking back, I think I was right to study mathematics at university. REGRET
Looking back, I ------- mathematics at university.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
145
1.Our spending will have to be reduced next year. BACK
We will have ------- our spending next year.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
2.The children were absolutely certain that the film would be fantastic. DOUBT
There ------- minds of the children that the film would be fantastic.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
3.Did anyone raise the subject of the school trip? BROUGHT
Can you tell me ------- the subject of the school trip?
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
4.I started learning English three years ago. BEEN
I ------- three years.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
5They are moving our oral examination to an earlier date. FORWARD
Our oral examination ------- to an earlier date.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
6.Do you want to go for a walk? asked Bob. FELT
Bob asked me ------- for a walk.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
7.Olivia did not concentrate so she made a lot of mistakes. WOULD
If Olivia ------- made fewer mistakes.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
8.Do you happen to know the time of the next train to London? COULD
I wonder ------- me the time of the next train to London?
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
9.The children are always fascinated by nature programmes on TV. FIND
The children ------- when they watch them on TV.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
10.What about going for a swim? John said to me. SHOULD
John ------- for a swim.
146
new
FAST CLASS
for First Certificate
VOCABULARY
exercises
compiled by magpak
147
UNIT 1 Exercise 1
Exercise 1/NOUN ENDINGS
Unit 1, Vocabulary, Exercise 1 (Write the sentences exactly.)
1. The older --- doesnt seem to understand young people. (generate)

__________________________________________________________________________________________________
2. I thought James was rich. In---- he hasnt got a penny! (real)
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
3. When our holiday was cancelled, it was a big ----for us. (disappoint)
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
4. I cant understand you----. You never do any work. (lazy)
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
5. The natural----of this part of Scotland is absolutely amazing. (beautiful)
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
6. Thank you for your ----during my stay. (generous)
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
7. It took me a long time to make the ---- to become a doctor. (decide)
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
8. They say that ---has nothing to do with material possessions its just a state of mind. (happy)
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
9. When I saw Maria, I got the --- that there was something worrying her. (impress)
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
10. Which do you think is more important: earning a lot of money, or job ----? (satisfy)
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
11. It takes a lot of --to succeed when everything seems to be against you. (determine)
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
148
UNIT 1 Exercise 2
Which word?
Choose the best words to complete the email. (Write the letter exactly.)
Hello Julia!
A quick email to --- (tell, make, let) you know that Ill be arriving on Saturday. Do you think you could --- (find, meet, see)
me at the bus station? Ill try to --- (give, phone, call) you a ring before I get there so you dont --- (ought-must-have) to
wait around too long for me. I --- (shouldnt, cant, wouldnt) wait to see you again! It seems a long time since I last saw
you. Could you give me an idea of what kind of clothes to --- (carry, back, bring) with me? And what ---- (about, for, with)
money? Can I --- (go, get, pass) by on a small amount, or will I --- (need, collect, gather) lots? --- (Talk, Meet, See) you soon.
Tracy
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
UNIT 1 Exercise 3
Expressions with way
Choose the correct expressions to complete the sentences. Use each phrase once only. There are two phrases you do not
need to use. (Write the sentences exactly.)
by the way, way out of, in he way, out of the way, one way or another, way out
1. ----, we will solve this problem.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
2. You want me to go bungee jumping? ----- !
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
3. Our ----is very simple, but we love it!
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
4. -----, did you remember to buy some bread while you were out?
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
5. I cant see any---- this problem, Im afraid.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
6. The cottage weve bought in the north of Scotland is a bit---.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
149
UNIT 1 Exercise 4
Negative prefixes
Make opposites of these verbs and adjectives using negative prefixes and use them to complete the sentences.
(Write the sentences exactly.)
like true perfect appear forgettable correct expensive
1. The fantastic holidays we had by the seaside when I was a child are ----.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
2. The hotel was clean and friendly, and much to our surprise, quite ----.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
3. Im afraid your answer is ----. The right answer is 72.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
4. I cant see your phone anywhere, but Im sure well find it. It cant just ----.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
5. We live in an ---- world, so dont be too disappointed if things go wrong.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
6. What you said about Jack was completely---- ! You shouldnt tell lies about people.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
7. Why do you ---- Maria? I think shes a really nice person.
UNIT 1 Exercise 5
The phrasal verb pick up

Choose the correct meaning of pick up to match the sentences. There is one meaning you will not need to use.
lift, buy, learn, increase, collect, try
1. Would you mind picking me up from the airport?
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
2. You speak Chinese really well. Was it difficult to pick it up?
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
3. Has anyone picked up my suitcase and put it in the car? I cant find it.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
4. Have cinema ticket sales picked up this month?
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
5. On your way home this afternoon, can you pick up some milk from the shops?
150
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
UNIT 1 Exercise 6
Other phrasal verbs with up
Choose the correct phrasal verbs to match the words in italics in the sentences.
Use each verb once only. There is one verb you do not need to use. (Write the sentences exactly.)
stand up for, clear up, make up, take in, make up with, keep up with, give up, come up with
1. Youll have to work much harder if you want to stay on the same level as the rest of the class.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
2. Its a difficult problem, but we have to think of a solution.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
3. Its raining now, but the forecast said it would become brighter later on.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
4. I must stop eating chocolate. Its too fattening.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
5. Can you support me in the meeting? Im really worried about it.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
6. Do you think that Ted and Carol will become friends again after their argument?
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
151
UNIT 1 Use of English
Multiple-choice cloze - For questions 112, read the text and decide which answer best fits each gap.
(Look at the title, then read the text to form an impression of what the text is about, before you think about the missing
words.) (Write the text exactly.)
Computer games love them or hate them?
A recent report on children and new technology emphasised the many opportunities for fun and learning that computer
games provide. But the media coverage focused on the usual fears and worries. The report 1 --- (said, spoke, told, talked)
that we need to move away from talking about computer games 2 -- (bringing, causing, making, supplying) harm. Experts
writing in the media, however, 3 --- (recommend, explain, show, prove) that computers and televisions should be 4 ---
(held, checked, protected, kept) in communal spaces in the home. I cant 5 --- (believe, suppose, think, imagine) of
anything more annoying for everyone concerned than playing games in a shared living room. Games 6 --- (do, form, make,
build) a noise: theyre surely going to irritate other family members who arent playing them. As a child in the 1980s, I had
both a television and a computer in my bedroom. I watched a lot of television, mostly when doing my homework, and I
sometimes 7 ---- (continued, stayed, waited, delayed) up late playing on my computer. The only lasting effect 8 --- (looks,
pretends, sounds, seems) to have been to provide me with the ability to work with any 9 --- (number, quantity, amount,
sum) of background noise. These days, as well as writing fiction, I write online computer games, 10 --- (so, as , since, while)
I expect Im prejudiced in favour of computer games. But for me, they can be works of art and literature, and theyre still
developing. The stories they can 11 --- (say, speak, talk, tell) and the experiences they provide are increasingly interesting
and wonderful. And that, of course, is the point. The world that todays children grow into will offer so many rich 12 ----
(practices, experiences, tests, events) through video games. The real neglect would be to deny our children the chance to
understand and enjoy them.
______________________________________________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________________________________________
152
UNIT 2 Exercise 1
Phrasal verbs with take

Use between 24 words including the correct form of a phrasal verb from the list.
(Copy the sentences exactly.)
take up (x2) take in take off take away take to take over take after take back
1. This shirt is too big. I'm going to return it to the shop.

This shirt is too big. I'm going to --- to the shop.
____________________________________________________________________________________________
2. This table occupies too much space in the kitchen.
This table --- too much space in the kitchen.
____________________________________________________________________________________________
3. Peter really resembles his father.
Peter really --- his father.
____________________________________________________________________________________________
4. If you subtract ten from the total, what do you get?
If you --- from the total, what do you get?
____________________________________________________________________________________________
5. I couldn't understand everything that the lecturer was explaining to us.
I couldn't --- everything the lecturer was explaining to us.
____________________________________________________________________________________________
6. A French company has just obtained control of our local water supply.
A French company has just --- our local water supply.
____________________________________________________________________________________________
7. What time does the plane leave?
What time does the plane ---?
____________________________________________________________________________________________
8. I don't know whether to accept the new job I've been offered.
I don't know whether to --- the new job I've been offered.
____________________________________________________________________________________________
9. I didn't like Jim when I first met him, but I do now.
I didn't --- Jim when I first met him, but I do now.
____________________________________________________________________________________________
153
UNIT 2 Exercise 2
Confusing words
Correct words (A, B or C) to complete the sentences.
1. Do you know who ---- the match last night?

__________________________________________________________________________________________
a) gained b) beat c) won
2. Could you ---- me your dictionary?
__________________________________________________________________________________________
a) lend b) take c) borrow
3. Telling lies ---- to me to be a dangerous thing to do.
__________________________________________________________________________________________
a) suggests b) believes c) seems
4. We decided to ---- the late-night film on TV.
__________________________________________________________________________________________
a) glance b) watch c) stare
5. Can you ---- a secret?
__________________________________________________________________________________________
a) keep b) remain c) stay
6. It took me a long time to ---- that Sarah is Toby's sister. She doesn't look like him at all.
__________________________________________________________________________________________
a) understand b) realise c) know
7. I am really ---- to my safari holiday.
8. __________________________________________________________________________________________
a) expecting b) hoping c) looking forward
UNIT 2 Exercise 3
Write between four and five words including if and would or could.
1. Are you free to attend the conference? Let us know.
Let us know --- to attend the conference.
__________________________________________________________________________________________
2. Is it possible for you to send me some details of the course? I would be very grateful.
I would be very grateful --- some details of the course.
__________________________________________________________________________________________
3. Think you might enjoy helping people in the local community? Contact Youth Volunteers.
Contact Youth Volunteers --- people in the local community.
__________________________________________________________________________________________
4. Can you put a brochure in the post for me? That would be a great help.
It would be a great help --- a brochure in the post.
__________________________________________________________________________________________
5. Do you want to become a news reporter? We can help.
We can help you --- become a news reporter.
__________________________________________________________________________________________
6. Try to phone me tomorrow morning. We can discuss the problem then.
--- tomorrow morning, we'll discuss the problem then.
__________________________________________________________________________________________
154
UNIT 2 Vocabulary Exercise 4
Formal and informal words
Choose the correct formal expression to match the informal words and phrases below.
There is one extra expression which you do not need.
(Write the words exactly.)
finally, take place, reply, received, express, mentioned, convinced
1. joining in: ______________________

2. please: ________________________
3. happen: ________________________
4. give it to: _______________________
5. answer: ________________________
6. said: __________________________
7. the last thing: ___________________
8. really sure: _____________________
9. got: ___________________________
UNIT 2 Exercise 5
Expressions with take
Choose the correct words to complete the sentences with a suitable expression with take.
There is one extra word which you do not need. (Write the sentences exactly.)
advantage, care, up, out, shape, part, time

1. Do you like taking --- in team sports?
__________________________________________________________________________________________
2. You work too hard. You should try and take it --- at the weekends.
__________________________________________________________________________________________
3. When I was at college I took --- of any opportunities I had to travel.
__________________________________________________________________________________________
4. The new sports stadium is beginning to take ---.
_________________________________________________________________________________________
5. Please take --- when crossing the road.
__________________________________________________________________________________________
6. It takes --- to do something well. You can't rush things.
__________________________________________________________________________________________
7. Exams really take it --- of you!
__________________________________________________________________________________________
155
UNIT 2 Exercise 6
Choose the correct words to complete the text. There is one extra word which you do not need.
career, working, qualifications, promotion, requirement, job, salary
Sales experience? Why not join Redways?

If you're not simply looking for a 1 ---- but for a long-term2---- with good prospects, then our company might be the one for
you! We can offer a competitive 3 ---- with opportunities for4 ---- in the near future. At Redways, we feel it is important to
provide our 5---- with a friendly 6 ---- environment, together with interesting challenges. If you have the right experience
and 7 ---- and would like to be part of an organisation where 8 ---- and employees really work together as a team, Redways
might be the right place for you. Phone us on 087 996 5443 for more information.
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
UNIT 2 Exercise 7
Verbs and meanings
Complete the sentences with one of these verbs. Write the correct form of the verb.
threaten deny suggest promise inform advise claim
1. It's no use ---- that you wrote the letter. I know that you wrote it.
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
2. I ---- that the next time I'm in town, I'll call you.
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
3. The person accused of the theft ---- that he is innocent.
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
4. If you have an accident in your car, you have to ---- the police.
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
5. I don't know what to do. Can you ---- me whether to take the job or not?
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
6. I hope you're not ---- that I should pay for the damage!
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
7. Bob ---- to tell the teacher that he had done Sally's homework for her.
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
156
UNIT 2 Exercise 8
Expressions with count
Choose the correct words and expressions to complete the sentences.
There is one extra expression which you do not need. (Write the sentences exactly.)
count towards, lost count of, counting on, count me in, count up to, counts, counting the cost of
1. I'm ---- you all to do your best in the competition.
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
2. Winning isn't the most important thing. What really ---- is enjoying the game.
____________________________________________________________________________________________________
3. I have a feeling that the marks for the presentation ---- your final grades.
____________________________________________________________________________________________________
4. The government is now ---- its transport policies as most cities are now congested with traffic.
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
5. I've ---- the number of times we've stayed in this hotel.
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
6. If everyone's going to the beach, you can ---- too.
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
157
(Look at the title, then read the text to form an impression of what the text is about,
before you think about the missing words.)
For questions 112, read the text and think of the word which best fits each gap. Use one word only in each gap.
(Write the text exactly.)
since soon there - no to own-did in over than who - could - of -

A different language
'Welcome to Wales: Croeso I Gymru,' the sign says in two languages, as has been the rule everywhere in the country since
1972. There is 1---- shortage of these bilingual signs in Wales: you can see them everywhere. According 2---- most people
in the UK, Wales has always been a very different country from the rest 3--- Britain: a country with its 4 --- culture. A
strong element of that culture is the Welsh language the most prominent minority language in the UK. However, only
around 20 per cent of the three million people who live there speak it. Famously, the poet Dylan Thomas did not speak the
language (though his parents 5 ---- ). The actor Richard Burton, also from the Welsh valleys, spoke it, and entertainer Tom
Jones can sing a few songs in Welsh, but isn't fluent. The point is not perhaps how the language has declined, but how it has
survived for so long, when English had been the official language ever 6 ---- 1536. However, as 7 ---- as the Welsh Language
Act was passed in 1993, the language had equal status with English.
8 ---- is no doubt that this, combined with television and radio broadcasts in Welsh, helped to keep the language from
further decline. 9---- addition, an increase in the number of bilingual primary schools means that the language may soon
be spoken by well 10 ---- fifty per cent of the population. Increasingly, tourism may also prove to be a friend rather 11 -----
an enemy, as it tended to be in the past when it contributed to the language's decline. Many new tourist attractions
strongly emphasise the language and its place in Wales's cultural identity. So for those12 ----- are visiting Wales for the first
time, deciphering the road signs is the first lesson in one of Europe's oldest languages.
____________________________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________________________
158
UNIT 3 Exercise 1
Compound adjectives
Choose the correct words to complete the compound adjectives in the sentences.Use each word only once. There is one
extra word which you do not need. (Copy the sentences exactly.)
loving, traditional, stopping, dropping, filled, storey, biting
1. Its a non --- circus. They dont use any animals in the show.
____________________________________________________________________________________________
2. The rollercoaster at the fairground is a nail --- ride!
____________________________________________________________________________________________
3. Dogs are fun--- animals. They like to play.
____________________________________________________________________________________________
4. A helicopter ride over the Grand Canyon isnt cheap, but the jaw --- view is worth the price!
____________________________________________________________________________________________
5. My aunt lives in a fifteen --- apartment building in the centre of town.
____________________________________________________________________________________________
6. Come to Adventure World for a fun ---- day of entertainment!
____________________________________________________________________________________________
UNIT 3 Exercise 2
Expressions with kick
Use an expression with kick in the correct form. Write between 24 words. (Copy the sentences exactly.)
1. Im angry about forgetting Sarahs birthday. I could --- for forgetting Sarahs birthday.
____________________________________________________________________________________________
2. Ill complain if they give us a bad room in that hotel again. I would --- if they gave us a bad room in that hotel again.
____________________________________________________________________________________________
3. They removed John from the football team after he had a fight. John --- of the football team after he had a fight.
____________________________________________________________________________________________
4. A big firework display opened the celebrations. The celebrations --- with a big firework display.
____________________________________________________________________________________________
5. The door had to be smashed down before the fire-fighters could enter the building. The fire-fighters had to --- the door
to enter the building.
____________________________________________________________________________________________
6. I could do nothing but wait around for my friend to arrive. All I could do was --- while I waited for my friend to arrive.
____________________________________________________________________________________________
159
UNIT 3 Exercise 3
Linking ideas
Choose the correct words to complete the text. (Copy the sentences exactly.)
1 --- (In addition, so that, although,) I watch a lot of films on TV at home sometimes 2 --- (although, while, during) Im
having a late supper I must admit that I prefer to see films at the cinema. I love the cinema 3 --- ( because, so, in order to)
I can see all the action on a really big screen. I think a lot of people go to the cinema 4 --- (nevertheless, so that, while) they
can appreciate the sound and visual effects more. And 5 --- (however, in addition, moreover) to enjoying a good film, its
also a night out and a chance to meet your friends. 6 ---- (in order to, nevertheless, since), sometimes its nice just to sit at
home on your favourite sofa and relax in front of the TV. Its cheaper, too!
____________________________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________________________
UNIT 3 Exercise 4
Complete the sentences. Choose despite, in spite or although.
1. We went for a long walk ---- the rain.
____________________________________________________________________________________________________
2. --- of the cold, we decided to go for a swim.
____________________________________________________________________________________________________
3. --- Sarah handed her homework in late, she got a good mark for it.
____________________________________________________________________________________________________
4. We enjoyed the holiday ---- the terrible weather!
____________________________________________________________________________________________________
5. --- it was their first holiday in Italy, Jims parents found it easy to pick up a few words of Italian.
____________________________________________________________________________________________________
6. I like Ted, --- of the fact that hes sometimes rather insensitive.
____________________________________________________________________________________________________
160
UNIT 3 Exercise 5
Words connected with the cinema

Choose the correct words to match the words in italics in the sentences.
Use each word only once. There is one extra word or phrase you do not need.
trailer, the screen, starring, acting, supporting role, special effects, leading role, new release, background music
1. They use beautiful North African songs and Spanish guitar pieces throughout the
film. Ive got the CD. _____________________
2. Its a great film, with Naomi Watts and Sean Penn. _____________________
3. The star won an Oscar for his performance. It was brilliant. _____________________
4. We saw the advert for the film in the cinema last week. _____________________
5. Avatar is definitely the most exciting film to appear in the cinemas this week. _____________________
6. I dont like to sit too close to it so I always book a seat at the back of the cinema. _____________________
7. Daniel Radcliffe plays the biggest part in the Harry Potter films. He is Harry. _____________________
8. All those amazing underwater battle scenes were created on computers. _____________________
UNIT 3 Exercise 6
Noun endings: verbs to nouns
Write nouns to match the definitions. Use the verbs below and these endings: -al, -ance, -er, -edge, -ing, -ion.
Make any necessary spelling changes.
ignore suspect interpret recognise paint collide survive know instruct
1. the information, understanding and skills that you get from learning or experience: _____________________
2. a person who translates what somebody is saying into another language: _____________________
3. when two objects crash into each other: _______________________________
4. not knowing or having information about something: _____________________
5. staying alive in difficult or dangerous circumstances: ______________________
6. seeing and remembering someone or something: _____________________
7. a feeling that something is true or someone is guilty even though you dont have proof: _____________________
8. teaching, or detailed information about how to do or use something: _____________________
9. a picture produced by an artist: _____________________
161
UNIT 3 Exercise 7
Adjectives ending in -ed and -ing
Make adjectives ending in -ed or -ing from these verbs. Write the adjectives to complete the sentences. Make any
necessary spelling changes. (Copy the sentences exactly.)
annoy amuse bore terrify amaze embarrass distress
1. I could never go climbing because Im --- of heights.
____________________________________________________________________________________________________
2. That new TV comedy show is really ----. Everyone says how funny it is.
____________________________________________________________________________________________________
3. was very --- when I met Jim for the second time because I just couldnt remember his name.
____________________________________________________________________________________________________
4. The news on TV is sometimes very --- because its all about disasters and wars. There never seems to be much good
news.
____________________________________________________________________________________________________
5. I get very ---- just sitting watching sport on TV. Id rather be out there taking part in it.
____________________________________________________________________________________________________
6. If theres one thing I find really --- on a train, its people who talk loudly on their mobile phone.
____________________________________________________________________________________________________
7. Shes a brilliant magician. Some of the tricks that she does are really --- !
____________________________________________________________________________________________________
162
Unit 3 Use of English
Word formation
Read the text and use the word given in capitals at the end of some of the lines to form a word that fits in the gap in the
same line. (Write the text exactly.)
A camping holiday in Canada I had never been camping before, so I was rather nervous when some friends suggested we
should go canoeing and camping in a national park near to our home in Canada. However, we 1 ----- (EVENTUAL) agreed
that it might be an exciting thing to do. So one morning in August, after a 2 --- (SATISFY) breakfast of coffee and pancakes,
six of us 3 --- (HAPPY) set off in three aluminium canoes across one of the lakes in the national park. Canoeing was not a
sporting 4 --- (ACTIVE) I knew much about, but after an hour or so, I began to see some 5--- (BAD) in my canoeing skills.
Everything went well until we suddenly noticed some black clouds on the horizon. Within ten minutes we were in the
middle of one of the 6 --- (IMPROVE) electrical storms I had ever seen. There was nothing for
it but to beach the canoes and try to find a 7 (SHELTER) spot to camp for the night. 8(FORTUNE), when we started to
unpack our camping gear, we realised that everything we had packed so carefully was soaking wet. This is not my idea of 9
(ENTERTAIN) , I thought to myself! We dried what we could around a small camp fire and tried to get some sleep.
I might have succeeded if someone hadnt been thoughtless enough to say Shout if you hear any unfamiliar noises in the
night. There are black bears in the area! I suddenly felt less than 10 --(ENTHUSIASM) about the trip and decided that I
wanted to go home!
____________________________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________________________
163
1.Unit 4 Exercise 1
Confusing words
Write the correct verbs to complete the pairs of sentences. (Copy the sentences exactly.)
Exercise 1
lose / miss
1. Im going to -- all my friends when I go to study abroad.
2. If you --- your passport, you wont be able to leave the country.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
advise / warn
3. I would --- you to revise all the grammar rules before your exam.
4. Mum did --- us not to go out without an umbrella!
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
drop / fall
5. Dont walk too near the edge of the path. You might --- !
6. If you --- that glass and it breaks, youll have to pay for it.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
reach / arrive
7. Do you think well --- our destination by nightfall?
8. If we --- at the airport very early, well have something to eat.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
164
2. Unit 4 Exercise 2
Making suggestions and recommendations
Choose the correct phrase to complete the sentences.
Use each phrase only once. There is one extra phrase which you do not need. (Copy the sentences exactly.)
suggested that the host families - should be could definitely show could give suggested having dinner
would also recommend going - recommends organizing
1. We --- the exchange students a guided tour of the town.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
2. They --- taken to see a play at the theatre.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
3. The headmaster ---- a day trip to London.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
4. I --- are invited to a farewell party.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
5. I --- to visit the local art gallery.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
6. The guide --- in the town centre.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
Emphasising a point
Rewrite the sentences with What at the beginning to emphasise the points made.
Write between 47 words, including What. (Copy the sentences exactly.)
1. We mustnt forget that some of the exchange students might be feeling homesick.
---- that some of the exchange students might be feeling homesick.
2.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
3. They probably dont want too many organised events. --- too many organised events.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
4. We must remember that some students need somewhere to study after school hours.
--- that some students need somewhere to study after school hours.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
5. Students really need to feel welcome. --- to feel welcome.

__________________________________________________________________________________________________
165
Expressions with do
Choose the expressions with do to complete the sentences. Use each expression twice. (Copy the sentences exactly.)
do with has nothing to do with could do with do away with do without make do with
1. Its really hot this afternoon. I -- an ice cream.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
2. The supermarket is closed so well just have to -- bread and milk until tomorrow.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
3. I dont want to go out because Im tired. It --- our argument yesterday.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
4. Do you think the government will ever --- free health care in this country?
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
5. I wish Mike could come to the meeting, but well have to --- him. Hes ill today.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
6. I dont know who sent you that text message, but it --- me!
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
7. It would be a lot better for the environment if we could --- cars!
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
8. I must say that I --- some peace and quiet. I have a bit of a headache.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
Adjectives expressing feelings
Choose the best adjectives to match the situations when you would experience these feelings.
Use each adjective once only. There is one extra adjective which you do not need to use.
curious surprised upset bored impatient terrified disappointed delighted excited
1. You are not interested in the TV programme that you are watching. _____________________
2. You are really looking forward to going to America on holiday. _____________________
3. You havent done as well as you expected in an exam. _____________________
4. You have received an expensive present but you dont know who its from. _____________________
5. You have just split up with your boyfriend or girlfriend. _____________________
6. Your best friend has just got engaged. _____________________
7. You are waiting in a long ticket queue at the station and your train is going to leave soon. _____________________
8. Your parents come to visit you unexpectedly at university. _____________________
166
Phrasal verbs with go
Choose the correct phrasal verbs with go to complete the sentences. Use each phrase only once.
go off go on with go by go down with go over go in for
1. Wear something warmer. You dont want to --- a cold.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
2. Dont let me interrupt you two. Please --- your conversation.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
3. I dont --- a lot of physical exercise.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
4. Could we --- the grammar again before the test tomorrow?
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
5. I cant believe how quickly the years ---. My children are both married now.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
6. If we dont put the food in the fridge, it will --- quickly in this heat.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
7. Unit 4 Use of English

given.
Do not change the word given. You must use between 25 words, including the word given.
1. The musicians rehearsal for tonights concert is still going on.

The musicians still ---- rehearsing for tonights concert. FINISHED
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
2. How much I earn is not important to me. It--- to me how much I earn. DIFFERENCE
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
3. I know for certain that the manager is not planning to recruit any new players next year.
I can assure you that the manager ---- any new players next year. INTENTION
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
4. Robert Merton wrote the screenplay for the Oscar-winning film.
The Oscar-winning films screenplay ----Robert Merton. WAS
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
5. We began to study Chinese two years ago. We --- two years now. FOR
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
6. What attracts you about living in this part of the country? Why--- in this part of the country? WANT
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
7. Im certain that youre excited about your trip to Australia. You ---your trip to Australia. LOOKING
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
8. That cinema near our house closed a month ago. That cinema near our house ---- month. SINCE
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
167
8. Unit 5 Exercises 1
Verbs of movement
Write down the correct form of these verbs to complete the sentences. (Write the sentences exactly.)
bob paddle roam stroll sweep

1. The hurricane ---- away everything in its path.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
2. Can you see that object ----- up and down in the river?
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
3. We could ---- down to the sea after dinner and watch the sun set.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
4. When we were children, we spent hours --- around the woods behind our house.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
5. Dogs dont really swim in water they ------.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
Words with similar meanings
Choose the expressions that have similar meanings to the words and phrases below.
Use each expression only once. There is one extra expression you do not need.
takes place, more and more, deserting, in search of, part of, reliable, make it out to be, plenty of, isolated,
drawbacks, nearby
1. lonely: ____________________________________________
2. a lot of: ____________________________________________
3. close: ______________________________________________
4. dependable: _________________________________________
5. leaving: _____________________________________________
6. occurs or happens: ____________________________________
7. disadvantages: ________________________________________
8. trying to find: _________________________________________
9. claim it is: ____________________________________________
10. increasing numbers of: __________________________________
168
Expressions with feel
Write one of these words and the correct form of the verb feel to complete the sentences.
The same verb may be used in more than one sentence.
isolated like free part of good up to strange
1. Do you ----- staying at home this afternoon, or would you rather go for a walk?
2. __________________________________________________________________________________________________
3. It certainly----- going back to my old school and remembering what it used to be like.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
4. Im so exhausted that I dont ---- playing tennis tonight. Sorry!
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
5. You might ----- if you lived on a remote island.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
6. I must admit that I never really ----- the community when I lived there because I didnt speak the language.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
7. ----- to do what you like this afternoon. We havent arranged anything special.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
8. I had to force myself to get up and go for a run, but I really ----- afterwards.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
Expressions with get

Choose the correct expressions with get to match the definitions.
Use each expression once only.
get out of doing something, get nowhere with, get your message across, get away with, get (somebody) down,
get on well with, get through, get around to doing something, get together, get over
1. do something bad, but not get caught: _________________________________________________.
2. find the time to do: ______________________________________________________
3. recover from:__________________________________________________________
4. avoid doing: __________________________________________________________
5. make (somebody) feel unhappy: __________________________________________
6. have a friendly relationship with:___________________________________________
7. meet:_________________________________________________________________
169
Expressions with get
Choose the correct expressions with get to complete the sentences.
Use each expression only once. There is one extra expression you do not need.
get through - get me down - get together - getting out of - get on well with - get your message across
getting nowhere with - get over
1. Polly is never going to ----- splitting up with her boyfriend.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
2. Dark winter nights really ---- .
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
3. Lets ---- for a coffee some time, shall we?
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
4. Bob always has some excuse for ---- doing the washing-up.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
5. All the students managed to ------ their final exams.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
6. Do you ---- all your relatives?
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
7. I feel as if Im ---- my driving lessons. Im still terrible!
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
8. Even if you speak the same language, it's not always easy to ------ .
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
9. Greg never gets into trouble for being late for work. How does he manage to -------.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
10. My room is a mess. One day Ill ---- to tidying it.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
170
Use an expression with get and these prepositions:
out of over on with around to down
1. Watching the news makes me feel really sad because its always depressing.
Watching the news really ----- because its always depressing.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
2. Tina and Steve are good friends because they both have a great sense of humour.
Tina ---- Steve because they both have a great sense of humour.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
3. Sam didnt want to give a speech at his friends wedding, but in the end he had to.
Although Sam tried, he couldnt ------- giving a speech at his friends wedding.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
4. Why do we never find the time to tidy up the garden?
Why do we never ---- tidying up the garden.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
5. Suzie did not recover from her illness quickly.
It took Suzie a long time ----- her illness.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
Different kinds of creatures

Choose a creature, A, B or C which is an example of each group 15.
1. mammal
a) snake b) mouse c) frog
2. insect
a) mosquito b) spider c) crab
3. cbarnivore
a) sheep b) wolf c) rabbit
4. herbivore
a) dolphin b) eagle c) elephant
5. reptile
a) piranah b) crocodile c) shark
171
For questions 112, read the text and decide which answer best fits each gap.
Tidal power
Imagine a world where energy could be produced cheaply and reliably a world of alternative energy where it didnt matter
if it wasnt sunny or the wind wasnt blowing. Well, this is about to become a reality, and the secret 1 (cover, stretches,
lies extends) in energy taken from under the sea. There is a 2 (building, growing, developing, raising) demand for energy
which is renewable and not based on gas, coal or nuclear power. Experts are now3 (convinced, considered, believed,
supposed) that if we dont take action and do something 4 (by, about, with, to) our future energy crisis now, many of the
Earths natural resources will 5 (wipe out, clean out, pass out, run out) . One energy company spokesman said yesterday
that tidal sites could produce as much as one sixth of the worlds power in years to come, and there is one very good 6
(purpose, cause, reason, effect) for this. Tidal currents are much better sources of energy than wind or solar power 7
(although, so that, even if, because) the flows of water are predictable and constant. Undersea turbines are 8 (regarded,
thought, seemed, realized) to be more environmentally friendly than wind turbines as they cant be seen from the surface
of the water, and fish and other sea creatures are less likely to be at 9 (risk, difficulty, danger, trouble) from the slow-
turning blades. The best sites for tidal power stations are places 10 (that, which, how, where) the tidal currents are strong
but for the same reason, they are not easy to construct. Another technical difficulty may be the creation of air bubbles
which could damage the turbines. 11 (However, Since, But, While) experts believe that this problem can be overcome. The
first tidal power site in Britain will be located 12 (anywhere, nowhere, somewhere, elsewhere) off the south coast and
begin power production later this summer. All the signs indicate that it will be a success.
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
172
Phrasal verbs with look

Write the correct form of these phrasal verbs with look to complete the sentences. Use each phrase only once.
look back on look up look into look after look out look through look up to
1. My brothers ---- the possibility of becoming a professional photographer.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
2. Someone I really -----is my grandmother. I think shes a wonderful person.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
3. I hope you ---- your essay carefully before you handed it in to be marked.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
4. ----- my childhood makes me feel happy.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
5. Aunt Grace thanked my mum for ---- our cousins while she was away on a business trip.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
6. -----! The car in front is about to turn right!
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
7. Could you ---- the meaning of the word sensible?
__________________________________________________________________________________________________

lie and lay
Write the correct form of lie or lay to complete the sentences.
1. Molly said that Bob was telling the truth, but I knew that he was -----.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
2. Helen ---- her hand gently on Pollys arm and told her not to worry.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
3. At the weekends, Clive---- in bed until midday, then gets up and watches TV.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
4. Please ----- the picture on the table, but be careful not to break the glass.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
5. Dont ----- on that sun bed. Its broken!
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
6. I know that Janet ---- to me yesterday about being ill, but I cant prove it.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
7. Paris ---- on the River Seine.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
173
Link words
Choose the correct link words to complete the article about a book.
There is one extra word/phrase you do not need.
who although because which - for that reason however - when
Murder mystery
Because, although, when, where, which, for that reason, however, who
I really enjoyed all of the short stories in Murder Mystery, but the story that I enjoyed most was about a woman 1 ----
went on holiday in the Welsh mountains. 2 ---- it was the longest story in the book, for me it was the most exciting one 3---
- it was about a murder 4---- had happened in a hotel a few years earlier. I like detective stories, so 5----- it was my
favourite story in the book. Usually I can guess whats going to happen at the end of the story. 6 ----- , this time I was
wrong. It was only 7 ---- I reached the end of the story that I knew I had made a mistake.
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________

Choose the correct expression with bottom to match the definitions.
come bottom, from top to bottom, start at the bottom, the bottom has fallen out of, get to the bottom of,
a bottomless pit, hit rock bottom
1. completely or thoroughly: ______________________________________________
2. be at the lowest point ever: _______________________________________ ______
3. collapse or failure of (something): _________________________________________
4. end up in the lowest or last position: _______________________________________
5. find an explanation for: __________________________________________________
6. begin in the lowest position: _______________________________________________
7. a never-ending supply or consumption of resources: _______________________________
174
Expressions with bottom
Choose the correct expressions with bottom to complete the sentences.
from top to bottom, come bottom, at the bottom, get to the bottom, a bottomless pit, bottom has fallen out of,
hit rock bottom
1. Im sorry I cant lend you any more money. Im not ----!

__________________________________________________________________________________________________
2. Why does my football team always --- of the league?
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
3. This house is in a terrible state. We need to clean it ----- .
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
4. Do you think we will ever ---- of this mystery?
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
5. Its a good time to buy property house prices have -----.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
6. The people who really understand this business are those who started -----.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
7. The ---- the luxury car market in the last few months. Nobody can afford to buy one.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
Phrasal verbs with cut

Choose the correct phrasal verbs with cut to complete the sentences.
1. 1You should ---- (cut in, cut off, cut back on) the snacks that you eat between meals. They arent good for you.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
2. I was chatting to my friend over the internet, but we were --- (cut up, cut off, cut across). All the lights suddenly went
out.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
3. Excuse me. Can I ----- (cut up, cut in, cut across) here? Ive got something important to say.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
4. Local residents protested about the number of trees they were going to ------ (cut up, cut down, cut across)
to build the new motorway.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
5. I enjoyed the film at the cinema, but I was disappointed when I watched it again
on DVD. The director had ---- (cut out, cut down, cut across) a couple of entire battle scenes.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
6. This new organisation aims to ----- (cut up, cut off, cut across) national barriers by recruiting people
from all over the world.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
7. The cake will be easier to serve if we cut ---- (cut it up, cut it off, cut it across) first.
175
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
Phrasal verbs with cut
Write the correct form of these phrasal verbs with cut to complete the sentences.
cut down cut back cut off cut across cut in cut up cut out
1. This international sports organization ----- all racial and cultural differences.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
2. When Bob was working away from home, he felt ---- from his friends and family.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
3. She --- the meat and gave the pieces to her pet dog.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
4. My parents felt really sad after we ---- the old oak tree. It had been there for years.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
5. I managed to ---- red meat from my diet two years ago. The doctor said it was bad for me.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
6. Jason always --- when people are talking. Hes very rude.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
7. We --- on a lot of things at the moment because Simon has lost his job.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
176
For questions 112, read the text and think of the word which best fits each gap.
Use only one word in each gap.
at during on with had something out off but except or which was who - by
Lifeboat rescue
Tired and hungry after spending more than five hours in their fishing boat out 1 ---- sea, a father and his three children
were rescued by a local lifeboat crew yesterday evening. The boats outboard motor had suddenly stopped working 2 ---- a
family fishing trip. 3 --- no power, the boat had begun to drift at the mercy of the waves when the weather suddenly took a
turn for the worse. The rescue marked the end of a four-hour search for the family, who4 been reported missing by the
childrens mother, Jodie Richards. She raised the alarm when they failed to return for lunch. She was convinced that 5 ---
terrible had happened to them, so she called the emergency services. Teams of rescuers then set 6 --- in a helicopter and a
lifeboat to try and find the fishing boat. Mrs Richards could do nothing 7 ---- wait and hope that the boat would be found by
either one rescue team 8--- the other. Mr Richards had raised a small, red sail, 9 he had attached to the top of a piece of
wood on the boat. It 10 ---- seen by the helicopter pilot, 11 contacted the lifeboat crew. The family was eventually brought
on board the lifeboat one 12 -- one, and the fishing boat was towed back to the harbour. Their first words to the lifeboat
crew were Thanks, guys. Do you think we could have a nice cup of tea?
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
177
Phrasal verbs with hang

Choose the correct phrasal verbs with hang to complete the sentences.
One phrasal verb has two meanings and there is one extra phrasal verb you do not need.
hang on - hang out - hang up - hang about - hang back - hang on
1. Can you ---- a minute while I get a pencil to write down your message?
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
2. Who do you usually --- with at the weekends?
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
3. When I phoned to make a complaint, the receptionist decided to --- on me!
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
4. A lot of young people seem to ---- outside the sports centre at night. Dont they have anything better to do?
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
5. Please dont ----. Be honest with me and say what you really think
about my idea.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
6. Please ---- the rail as you walk up these stairs. Theyre very steep.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
Preposition + -ing
Complete the sentences using the correct preposition and a suitable verb in the -ing form. Write two words.
of /for/on/in/about V-ing
1. Im tired ----television. Lets go and play tennis!
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
2. We blame Jack ----to tell us that we had a test today. He should have remembered.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
3. Im quite good at photography. Are you keen --- photographs, too?
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
4. My parents arent interested ---- to modern music.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
5. Do you ever get fed up --- the same job day after day?
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
6. Im really worried ---- to the dentist tomorrow.
178
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
Expressions with make

Choose the correct expressions with make to complete the second sentence so that it has a similar meaning
to the first sentence. There is one extra expression you do not need.
make the most of - make out - make up - make do with - make a habit of -
1. You should gain as much advantage as possible from your time at university.
You should ---- your time at university.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
2. When I looked carefully, I could see a ship on the horizon.
When I looked carefully, I was able to --- a ship on the horizon.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
3. There are lots of nice things on the menu, but I cant decide what to have.
There are lots of nice things on the menu, but I cant --- my mind what to have.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
4. Well just have to use whatever food weve got in the fridge tonight.
Well just have to ---- whatever food weve got in the fridge tonight
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
5. You shouldnt get used to eating too much fast food.
You shouldnt ---- eating too much fast food.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
Expressing opinions -Choose the correct words to complete the sentences. There are two extra words you do not need.
against course admit extent line trouble sheer doubt well
1. Im not-- motorways as such, but I dont like the traffic noise they create.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
2. With more and more cars on the roads, of --- we need new motorways.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
3. You have to --- that the safety aspect is worrying, too.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
4. To a certain --- , it doesnt really matter where a new motorway is built.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
5. The bottom --- is that if you want good roads, you have to make sacrifices.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
6. The --- is that motorways affect the lives of the people who live near to them.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
7. Its the --- amount of traffic on the roads thats the problem.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
8. There is no --- in my mind that we must find places to build more motorways.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
9. Its all very --- being in favour of motorways, but who wants one on their doorstep?
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
179
Words connected with travelling

Choose the best words to complete the text.
Have you ever been on a guided 1 --- (journey, tour, flight) ? Independent 2 --- (travel, trip vovage) has always interested
me, and I never thought I would enjoy anything like that until we went on a day 3 ---- (journey, travel, trip) in Egypt. We
were having a weeks cruise in the Mediterranean. The 4--- (voyage, flight, travel) to Cyprus from Birmingham airport had
been uneventful. After landing, we were taken to the ship and were soon on our way to Port Said, in Egypt. The 5 ---
(voyage, tour, ride) by sea from Cyprus takes about sixteen hours, but the weather was bad and some passengers werent
feeling too well. Eventually we arrived at our destination at 5.30 in the morning. The 6---- (tour, travel, drive) to Giza (in an
air-conditioned coach) took about three hours. The roads in Egypt were not busy at that time of the day so we had a
pleasant 7 -- (journey, travel, voyage), and the guide was able to tell us all about the places of interest we passed. Perhaps
the most exciting event for my youngest son was a 8 (drive, travel, ride) on a camel. However, for us, it was a chance to see
things we had only read about in books or seen in photographs.
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________

Expressions with eye
Choose the correct expressions with eye to match the definitions.
There is one extra expression you do not need.
see eye to eye - keep an eye on - catch your eye - keep your eyes peeled - have eyes in the back of your head - up to your
eyes in
1. have the same opinion as someone:__________________________________
2. take care of: _____________________________________
3. attract your attention: __________________________________
4. look out for something: __________________________________
5. know whats happening all around you: __________________________________
6. be very busy: __________________________________
180
Question
Expressions with eye
Write the correct form of the expressions with eye below to complete the sentences.
see eye to eye have eyes in the back of your head catch your eye up to your eyes in keep an eye on keep your
eyes peeled
Could you ---- the dog for a moment while I pop into the supermarket?
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
1. I wont have time to go out tonight. Im --- my revision.
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
2. Im sorry I let the food burn, but I was on the phone and I dont --- .
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
3. The shop we want to go to is somewhere on this road, so --- !
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
4. I was looking through the paper this morning when this job advert -- .
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
5. My father and I are very different, and we dont always --- .
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________

Word formation-Read the text and use the word given in capitals at the end of some of the lines
to form a word that fits in the gap in the same line.
FANTASY BEAUTY SURROUND COMFORT BE RELUCTANT INFINITE EQUIP PRACTICE - ENTHUSIASTIC
But is it really camping?
This isnt exactly my idea of a family camping holiday. As a child, my parents took me on some absolutely 1--- trips to
Scotland and Wales, where wed huddle together on thin mats on the hard ground under the 2 --- night sky and cook our
meals on a campfire. But now, on my first family camping trip as a parent myself, here I am 3 ---- by, amongst other things,
airbeds, pillows, chairs and a table. At least well be 4 , says my husband. Now I dont want to sound unadventurous, but I
really cant help thinking that we might as well be staying in a hotel. Isnt going camping all about 5----- in touch with
nature? Surely feeling stiff when you wake up after sleeping in a tent is what its all about? With some 6 --- though, I have
to admit that eating at a table is 7--- better than sitting on a cold, hard rock. However, Im convinced that we have brought
with us far more 8 --- than we will ever need. Our 9 about this camping trip led to an extravagant shopping spree at our
local camping shop. Getting everything in the car was a real struggle and even though we have a cooker better than the one
at home, we still managed to end up eating in a restaurant last night. Next year, well be more 10 and just book a week in
a hotel!
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
181
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
Talking about the weather

Choose the correct words to match the definitions.
There is one extra word you do not need.
mist downpour lightning blizzard hurricane thunder heat wave sleet
1. clouds of tiny drops of water: _________________________________________.

2. a heavy, sudden fall of rain: _________________________________________.
3. atmospheric electricity: ____________________________________________.
4. a severe snowstorm with strong winds: _________________________________________.
5. a very violent storm with very strong winds: _________________________________________.
6. a loud noise in the sky during a storm: _________________________________________.
7. a short period of extremely hot weather: _________________________________________.
8. a mixture of snow and rain: _________________________________________.

Talking about the weather
There is one extra word you do not need.
hurricane blizzard thunder mist lightning downpour- sleet heatwave
1. This huge circle on the satellite photo shows a strong --- moving north-eastwards towards the coast of Florida.
___________________________________________________________.
2. The biggest threat to our Arctic expedition is finding ourselves caught in a--- .
___________________________________________________________.
3. Did you hear the---- last night? I couldnt sleep because of the noise!
___________________________________________________________.
4. The early morning---- hung over the valley as we made our way down the mountain.
___________________________________________________________.
5. They say that---- never strikes in the same place twice!
___________________________________________________________.
6. On our way home we got caught in a torrential---- , but it only lasted a few minutes.
___________________________________________________________.
7. I think that---- always makes driving very difficult after a while, it starts to lie on the road just like snow.
___________________________________________________________.
8. We had a----- last month, and it was almost too hot to work.
182
___________________________________________________________.
Verbs of movement
Write the correct form of these verbs of movement to complete the sentences. More than one answer may be possible.
fling creep fumble crouch tiptoe bound freeze leap stare
I---- in my bag, trying to find the car keys, but they werent there.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
1. Hasnt anyone ever told you that it is rude to ----- at people?
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
2. I woke at 6.30, ---- off the duvet and quickly got dressed.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
3. The lion was waiting to --- out suddenly as the herd of zebra passed by.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
4. What on earth are you doing ---- around the house like a burglar?
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
5. The deer ----- across the road in front of the astonished motorist.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
6. Bobby ---- behind the wall where the other boys couldnt see him.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
7. If you ---- across the floor when you leave the room, you wont wake the baby.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
8. When David noticed that the door to his flat had been forced open, he ----- .
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
Phrasal verbs with set
Choose the correct meanings to match the phrasal verbs with set in the sentences.
Two phrasal verbs have the same definition and there is one extra definition you do not need.
delay - the progress of leave write leave establish- begin and seem likely to continue
1. The blizzard set our trip back a few hours.: ___
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
2. What time did you set off for the station this morning? ---
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
3. Why dont you set your ideas down in a report? ----
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
4. We set out on our journey with high hopes. -----
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
5. The charity was set up a few years ago. ----
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
6. I think this snow has set in for the rest of the afternoon. ------
183
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
Adjectives with opposite meanings
Write letters to complete each adjective with the opposite meanings to the adjective in the clue.
1. enormous: t________________________________________________________y
2. thin (a persons build): o______________________________________________t
3. wide: n ___________________________________w
4. ugly: p ____________________________________y
5. happy: m _______________________________________________________e
6. old-fashioned: m ________________________________________________n
7. dark-haired: b ___________________________________________________e
Phrases with look

Write the correct form of these phrases with look to complete the sentences.
look (your) age like the look of never look back (not) much to look at look after (yourself) look ahead look around
1. Is your uncle really 75? He doesnt ----- at all!
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
2. If we had a crystal ball, we could ---- and see the future.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
3. Julias not very well. She really doesnt ------ properly!
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
4. The restaurant wasnt ----- , but the food was delicious.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
5. If you ----- , you might see someone you know well!
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
6. I dont ---- those black clouds over there. I think its going to rain!
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
7. After getting her first novel published, Sarah ----- .
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
184
Using adverbs
Click on the correct words (A, B or C) to complete the sentences.
1. 1It was very hot on the crowded train and I felt ..... hot in my heavy coat.
a) fully b) extremely c) completely
2. Although the person sitting opposite Ted seemed ordinary enough, there was something about him that was .....
suspicious.
a) narrowly b) nearly c) slightly
3. Susan ..... put her books in her briefcase and ran to catch the bus.
a) hurriedly b) briefly c) hardly
4. I have to go now! said Edward, ..... ending our conversation.
a) presently b) shortly c) abruptly
5. Although I knew that I would probably regret it, I ..... agreed to take my younger brother to a theme park.
a) reluctantly b) apologetically c) completely
6. We have to take this book back to the library ..... because its overdue.
a) hurriedly b) straight away c) briefly
7. Ben ..... had the nerve to ask me to lend him some money!
a) actually b) absolutely c) realistically

Key word transformations
given. Do not change the word given.
Use between 2 and 5 words, including the word given.
1. The annual ski competition is held in these mountains.
The ski competition ------ in these mountains. PLACE
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
2. The St Bernard dogs saved the lives of the skiers.
It was the St Bernard dogs ----- of the skiers. RESCUE
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
3. It was impossible to reach the isolated farm when it snowed.
The isolated farm ----- the rest of the world when it snowed. OFF
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
4. The football fans ran enthusiastically towards their hero.
The football fans ------ towards their hero. DASH
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
5. We did not have enough time to pack for our trip.
There ---- us to pack for our trip. TOO
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
6. Supplies were urgently needed to feed the victims of the storm.
The authorities ----- supplies to feed the victims of the storm. NEED
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
7. What attracts you to this area?
What ---- this area? FIND
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
8. The local tennis championship was won by a player called Swanson.
A player ---- won the local tennis championship. WHOSE
185
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
Talking about feelings and capabilities

Choose the correct expressions to complete the sentences.
Use each expression only once. There is one expression you do not need to use.
not capable of - laid back about - defensive about - unable to - reluctant to - have difficulty
1. Although Im not bad at the piano, Im --- performing in a concert or anything like that.
___________________________________________________________.
2. Olivia is very --- her final exams, but I dont know why. If I had a big exam tomorrow, I would be really nervous!
___________________________________________________________.
3. Nick shouldnt be so ----- his cooking. Hell never improve if he cant take any criticism.
___________________________________________________________.
4. If anyone is ----- swim, please contact me and we will arrange for them to have lessons.
___________________________________________________________.
5. Were ---- invite Sam to go on holiday with us again because he always complains.
___________________________________________________________.
6. I always ----- remembering peoples birthdays, so I write them in my electronic calendar.
___________________________________________________________.

Phrasal verbs with more than two parts
Choose the correct phrasal verbs to match the meanings.
break up with - come down with - face up to - catch up with- be fed up with - get away with
1. end a relationship:________________________________________________
2. become ill: :_____________________________________________________
3. cope with a situation: :_____________________________________________
4. hear someones news: :____________________________________________
5. be tired of: :_____________________________________________________
186
Phrasal verbs with more than two parts
Use a word from A in the correct form and a pair of words from B.
A face fed catch break come
B up with (x3) down with up to
1. Finding out what your friends have been doing when you come back from holiday is great.
Its great to ---- your friends when you come back from holiday.
___________________________________________________________.
2. I was sorry to hear that Toby has ended his relationship with Marianna.
I was sorry to hear that Toby has ----- Marianna.
___________________________________________________________.
3. I get annoyed when people tell me to act my age.
Im ----- people telling me to act my age.
___________________________________________________________.
4. Susan looks as if shes going to catch a cold.
Susan looks as if she might be ---- a cold.
5. You must deal with the fact that life isnt always what you want it to be.
You have to ---- the fact that life isnt always what you want it to be.
___________________________________________________________.
Informal and formal phrases
Write letters to complete each word with a more formal word than the phrase in italics.
1. I am writing about the job advertisement which I saw in yesterdays paper.
which a __ __ __ __ __ __ d
___________________________________________________________.
2. Your advertisement said something about an online application form.
m __ __ __ __ __ __ __ _d
___________________________________________________________.
3. Could you give me some extra information about the job?
some a __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ l information
___________________________________________________________.
4. I like the idea of applying for the job.
am I __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ d in
___________________________________________________________.
5. Could you let me know how much money I would earn?
what the s __ __ __ __ y would be
___________________________________________________________.
6. I hope to hear from you soon.
look f __ __ __ __ __ __d to hearing
___________________________________________________________.
187
Words relating to illness
Use each word only once. There is one expression you do not need to use.
cure patient medicine - treatment immunize outbreak epidemic quarantine - hospital
1. successful remedy for an illness or disease:___
________________________________________________________________________________________________
2. someone receiving medical care:_____
________________________________________________________________________________________________
3. pills or liquid taken when you are ill: _____
________________________________________________________________________________________________
4. a course of action taken to cure an illness: _____
________________________________________________________________________________________________
5. give protection against a disease with an injection:____
________________________________________________________________________________________________
6. first appearance of a disease: ____
________________________________________________________________________________________________
7. the quick spread of a disease to a large number of people:_____
________________________________________________________________________________________________
8. a method of keeping a disease away from others: _____
________________________________________________________________________________________________
Phrasal verbs with fall
Write the correct form of these phrasal verbs with fall to complete the dialogues.
fall through fall for fall in with fall apart fall out with fall back on
1. Megan: I dont know how Im going to manage financially if I lose my job.
Sally: Youll have to ____ your savings.
________________________________________________________________________________________________
2. Ali: Tony was talking about going skiing next winter.
Josh: I know and he always expects everyone to _______ his plans, but I cant afford it.
________________________________________________________________________________________________
3. Lucy: I wouldnt sit on that chair its _____ .
Dan: Well, it looks pretty strong to me. Ill risk it.
________________________________________________________________________________________________
4. Sarah: I thought you were moving house last week.
Max: We were going to, but all the arrangements ____ at the last minute.
________________________________________________________________________________________________
5. Ivan: Is Greg going out with Polly now?
Simon: Yes, he ____ her in a big way at the end-of-term party.
________________________________________________________________________________________________
6. Melanie: I hear Peter has changed his job?
Carl: Yes, he has. He _____ his boss last month and decided to leave.
________________________________________________________________________________________________
188
Expressions with put

Rewrite the words in italics using these expressions with put. Write between two and three words.
put up with (be) put out put (somebody) off put in for put (somebody) down
1. I was really upset when David said he wouldnt be coming to my party. _____
________________________________________________________________________________________________
2. Why dont you apply for a job in computers? Im sure youd enjoy it. _____
________________________________________________________________________________________________
3. No one likes her. Shes always trying to make people feel stupid.
________________________________________________________________________________________________
4. I didnt like the fish I ate last time we came to this restaurant, but dont let that persuade you not to have it. __
________________________________________________________________________________________________
5. I cant move house so Ill just have to tolerate my noisy neighbours. ___
________________________________________________________________________________________________
47. Unit 9 Exercises

Expressions connected with work
Choose the correct expressions to complete the sentences.
full time - good salary - self-employed - temporary - part-time - apply - long hours - resign
1. I make a lot of money in my job. I get a ---- and they pay my expenses.
________________________________________________________________________________________________
2. I work at home because Im ------ .
________________________________________________________________________________________________
3. The job Im doing only lasts for two months. Its ----- work.
________________________________________________________________________________________________
4. Im a student so I need a ---- job. Working just two or three nights a week would be ideal for me.
________________________________________________________________________________________________
5. This looks like a good job for me. I think Ill ---- for it.
________________________________________________________________________________________________
6. I sometimes work until very late at night you have to work ---- when you own a restaurant.
________________________________________________________________________________________________
7. I hate this job. In fact, Im going to ----- !
________________________________________________________________________________________________
189
For questions 112, read the text below and decide which answer best fits each gap.
Why are people so interested in sport?

I dont share the enthusiasm of many of my friends and relatives for sport. To my 1 ----- (belief, opinion, mind, idea), its
merely a hobby, but it seems to be 2 ----(far, largely, lot, many), more than that to them. This is an attitude that I cannot
really 3---- (guess, imagine, realize, understand) . I am not at all interested in finding out the latest football score, or even
watching sport on TV, but as soon as the sports fanatics I know see that a match is scheduled, they make for the TV on
switch at top 4 (hurry, speed, haste, rush), . Surely such dedication cant be any good for anybody? Maybe my attitude
towards sport can be 5 (mentioned, explained, told, said) by my rather unpleasant memories of playing hockey at school
in the pouring rain and freezing cold. If the weather had been kinder, perhaps 6 (having, doing, taking, making) part in
the sport might have been more enjoyable. As it was, not even the thought of winning the game managed to7 cause,
make, result, fast,force) me feel that the activity was worth all the effort I put into it. One thing does fascinate me about
sports fanatics, 8 (yet, even, although, however) , and that is the pleasure they take in 9 ---- (commenting, talking,
meaning, describing) the match they have just watched. They dont even seem to care if they occasionally 10 ---- (fall
through, fall out, fall off, fall over) with their best friends about the outcome. All that seems to interest them is
convincing anyone willing to listen that they are right! Sport may well be a 11 --- (way, manner, means, route) of life for
some people, but as far as I am 12 ---- covered, included, concerned, contained), give me a good book and a comfortable
armchair any day of the week!
________________________________________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________________________________________
190
Phrasal verbs with turn

Write the correct form of these phrasal verbs with turn to complete the sentences.
One phrasal verb is used in two sentences.
turn back turn down turn into turn out turn over
1. Surely youre not thinking of ---- an offer like that. Its the chance of a lifetime!
___________________________________________________________.
2. When the mist began to fall on the mountain, the walkers ---- .
___________________________________________________________.
3. Caterpillars ---- butterflies.
___________________________________________________________.
4. The weathers ----- nice again today, hasnt it?
___________________________________________________________.
5. If you ---- the page, youll see the article I wrote.
___________________________________________________________.
6. The TVs really loud and Im trying to sleep. Can you ----- the volume, please?
___________________________________________________________.
Phrasal verbs with turn
Rewrite the phrase in italics using a phrasal verb with turn. Write two words.
1. If you cant do the questions in one part of the exam, move on to the next page.
___________________________________________________________.
2. That music is very loud. Can you reduce the volume?
___________________________________________________________.
3. Is it possible for aggressive children to become nice adults?
___________________________________________________________.
4. Why did he decide not to accept the job offer?
___________________________________________________________.
5. The bad weather made us stop our journey and go back home.
___________________________________________________________.
6. Dont worry about it. It will be alright in the end.
___________________________________________________________.
191
Expressions with change

Replace the words in italics in the sentences using the correct form of these expressions with change.
Use each expression once only.
change the subject change money change your clothes change your mind change trains
1. I wanted to carry on discussing the childrens education, but Ted started talking about something different.
___________________________________________________________.
2. Do you want to alter your decision about what you have ordered to eat?
___________________________________________________________.
3. We had to stop at Banbury Railway Station and get another connection to London.
___________________________________________________________.
4. I wanted to buy some local currency, but the bank was shut.
___________________________________________________________.
5. Have I got time to put something different on before we go to the theatre?
___________________________________________________________.

Word formation
Write down the correct form of the word in brackets to complete the sentences.
1. After some ---- , I decided which job I wanted to take. (consider)
___________________________________________________________.
2. The teacher ---- explained to the parents that their child was not the brightest student in the class. (tact)
___________________________________________________________.
3. I dont think that was a very ---- comment to make. (amuse)
___________________________________________________________.
4. Do you have any ---- as to where we might go tonight? (suggest)
5. It was very ---- of you to give me those beautiful flowers! (think)
___________________________________________________________.
6. Whats the ---- between fried and mashed potatoes? (differ)
___________________________________________________________.
7. Could you put your ----- here on this document, please? (sign)
___________________________________________________________.
8. The rain has ----- ruined our picnic! (complete)
___________________________________________________________.
192
Words connected with buying and selling
Choose the correct words to match these words with their opposites.
save - decrease - supply income- consumers- purchases- sellers- manufacturers
1. spend: _______________________________________
2. increase: _______________________________________
3. demand: _______________________________________
4. expenditure: _______________________________________
5. suppliers: _______________________________________
6. sales: _______________________________________
7. buyers: _______________________________________
Words connected with buying and selling

Market - customers brands products industry factory earnings profits companies - merchandise
1. demand for goods: ______________________________________________________________
2. people who buy goods and services: ________________________________________________
3. names of products made by a particular company: ____________________________________
4. any goods made by human beings: _________________________________________________
5. a branch of trade or manufacture: __________________________________________________
6. a place where goods are manufactured: _____________________________________________
7. money made by working: _________________________________________________________
8. money made by selling for more than the production cost: ______________________________
9. business organisations selling goods or services: ______________________________________
10. a formal word for goods that are on sale: ____________________________________________
193
Verbs and prepositions

Write the correct preposition to complete the phrases.
One preposition can be used twice.
for on by into up to
1. to branch out ---
____________________________________
2. pay --- credit card
____________________________________
3. spend money --- something
____________________________________
4. appeal -- somebody
____________________________________
5. put pressure ----- somebody
____________________________________
6. sell something ---- a lot of money
____________________________________
7. buy ---- a lot of something
____________________________________
Phrasal verbs with bring

Choose the correct phrasal verbs with bring to match the meanings.
Use each word once only.
1. mention in conversation: ____________________________________________________.

2. launch a new product: _______________________________________________________.
3. make something difficult succeed: _____________________________________________.
4. introduce a new measure or law: ______________________________________________.
5. make something happen earlier: ______________________________________________.
6. return: __________________________________________________.
7. cause to fall: _____________________________________________.
8. make happen: _____________________________________________.
194
Phrasal verbs with bring
Write the correct form of the phrasal verbs below to complete the sentences.
Add pronouns if necessary.
bring off bring about bring in bring down bring back bring up bring forward bring out
1. Congratulations on your success Im delighted you managed to!

________________________________________________________.
2. I have your dental appointment its now Monday instead of Tuesday.
________________________________________________________.
3. Have you heard that theyre a new law on smoking?
________________________________________________________.
4. The new model of our popular sports car was a few weeks ago.
________________________________________________________.
5. Bad publicity was responsible for the new minister.
________________________________________________________.
6. Please dont the subject of politics at dinner Sam will go on for hours.
________________________________________________________.
7. Have you any idea what the train crash?
________________________________________________________.
8. Remember to the library books youve borrowed after three weeks.
________________________________________________________.
195
Unit 10 Use of English
Word formation
For questions 110, use the word given in capitals at the end of some of the lines
to form a word that fits in the gap in the same line.
Student fashion show

A professional fashion show has never been my idea of a great night out, but my sister is studying clothes design at college
and her class put on an end-of-term fashion show to which I was invited. I didnt really want to go because I expected the
whole thing to be a 1--- (DISASTER) failure, so I rather 2 --- (UNWILLING) agreed to go along. However, the introduction to
the show was very 3 ---- (IMPRESS) indeed with all the models performing handstands and cartwheels. All the physical
activity made it look a bit too 4--- (ATHLETE) for a fashion show to me but it certainly succeeded in getting the attention
of the audience! I had expected all the models to be female, but 5 --- (SURPRISE) enough, there were quite a few males
modelling the clothes, too. They say theres never anything totally new in fashion, but the show
proved this to be 6 ---- (TRUTH) . Everything that the students had created looked new and 7 --- (ATTRACT). As I looked
around the audience, I could see what I suspected might be people looking for new talent. And what better place to look
than a student fashion show! To make the whole thing more 8 --- (ENTERTAIN) , the young designers had asked their
audience to be the judges of their success or failure, and award a first, second and third prize for the designs. There were
so many 9 ---- (STYLE) ones to choose from that we had a hard time. But my
___________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________
196
Writing
197
UNIT 1 Writing
Informal email
Read the exam question, then write your answer in 120150 words in an appropriate style in the text box.
You have received an email from your English-speaking pen-friend Harry, who is planning to come to your country for a
two-week holiday. Read Harrys email and the notes you have made. Then write an email to Harry, using all your notes.
From: Harry Cooper
Sent: 1st April
Subject: Summer holiday
Hi! Great news! Ive got two weeks free this summer and
Id really like to spend the time touring round your country.
What do you think I should try and see? (Make some recommendations)
Another thing, what would be the best way to travel? (Say how and why)
I will also need somewhere to stay but not too expensive, of course. (Suggest some alternatives)
If I do come, will you be free to travel round
with me for some of the time? It would be great if you could. (Unfortunately, no because ...)
Hoping to hear from you soon.

Harry
Practice: Write your email. You must use grammatically correct sentences with
accurate spelling and punctuation in a style appropriate for the situation.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
198
Unit 1, Writing
Sample answer and comments
Read the sample answer. Do you think it's a good answer? Look at the comments below it and find out.
To Harry Cooper
Subject Summer holiday
Date 3rd April
Hi Harry.
Good to hear from you. Its great that you are coming to my country for a holiday.
You can see a lot of things in two weeks. The best things to see are the capitol city, the mountains and
the area by the sea. The most interesting way travelling is in coach. That way you see more and it isnt
expensive.
As for somewhere to stay, there are plenty of youth hostels and bed and breakfast places. But you might
prefer to bring a tent. That would be the cheapest way.
Im sorry but I wont be able to come with you because Ive got a summer job working in a hotel by the
sea. Maybe we can see us when you visit the coast.
All the best for now.
[132 words]
Comments on the sample answer:

Although there are some mistakes (way travelling instead of way to travel, in coach instead of by coach, us instead of
each other and capitol instead of capital), this is quite a good answer. The writer has mentioned all the points referring
to the notes he has made and has given Harry the information he asked for. At 132 words, the answer is within the word
limit [120-150 words]. The writing is laid out like an email and the writer has used paragraphs to introduce the different
sections. The style and vocabulary are suitable for an informal email, e.g. the use of the contractions isnt, Im and wont,
and the informal expression Good to hear from you. The grammar and spelling are also mainly accurate.
199
UNIT 2 Writing
Formal letter
Read the exam question, then write your answer in 120150 words in an appropriate style in the text box on the right.
1 Your college is organising a variety show to raise money to buy more books for its library. Read the letter sent out to
students who might be interested in taking part in the show and the notes you have made.
Dear students,
I am writing to inform you about an interesting event
which will take place this term. (Need to know when)
The college is organising a variety show to raise money to

buy more books for its library.
The show will be performed entirely by college students.
If you would like to audition to take part in the show, (Say yes)
let us know what you can do by completing the reply (Explain what)
slip and handing it in to the college secretary. In addition, please send in your ideas for
what might be included in the show. If you have any questions, (Make suggestions)
please do not hesitate to contact me.
Yours sincerely,
Brian Sutherland
College Principal
Write your letter. You must use grammatically correct sentences with accurate spelling and punctuation in a style
appropriate for the situation.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
200
Unit 2, Writing
Dear Mr Sutherland,
Thank you for your letter about the variety show. It seems a very good way to raise money to buy new
books and I would be very interested in take part in an audition. I can play the guitar and sing quite well.
There is, however, one thing I would like to ask you. Could you possibly let me know exactly when the show
will it take place? I will be away for some of the time this term so I need know.
As for my ideas for the show, I would suggest that you have a mixture of completely different things, for
example, dancing, singing, people playing musical instruments and perhaps peforming some short plays.
I look forward to your reply. When I know exactly when the show is, I will complete the reply slip and hand
it in.
Yours sincerely,
Sarah Goodwin
(147 words)

Although there are some mistakes ('interested in take part' instead of 'interested in taking part', 'the show will it
take place' instead of 'the show will take place', 'I need know' instead of 'I need to know', and 'peforming' instead
of 'performing'), this is quite a good answer. The writer has mentioned all the points referring to the notes she has
made. At 147 words, the answer is within the word limit (120150 words). The writing is laid out like a formal letter
and the writer has used paragraphs to introduce the different sections. The style and vocabulary are suitable for a
formal letter, e.g. no contractions are used, but more formal expressions like 'I would suggest that you have' and 'I
look forward to' are used. The grammar and spelling are also mainly accurate.
201
UNIT 3 Writing
Essay (Part 2)
Your class had had a discussion about the advantages and disadvantages of tourism. As a follow-up, your teacher has asked
you to write an essay on the following topic, giving reasons for your opinions.
The world would be a better place without tourism.
Write your essay.
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
202
Unit 3, Writing
FILMS I LOVE AND HATE

I go to the cinema regularly because I prefer to see films on a big screen.
The kinds of films I like are fast-moving and have plenty of action. I am particularly interested in special
effects so I watch the trailers for new releases very careful because I do not want to lose any good films.
A enjoyable film for me should also have memrable background music that I want to listen to again after I
have seen the film.
So what kind of films do I hate? I really dislike films which are badly acted or have very little story, like
love stories, for example. I get very board in the cinema if nothing much is happening on the screen and I
feel that the acting is terrible. If the person in the leading role is not a very good actor, then I feel I have
wasted my money on the cinema ticket.
For these reasons, I always try to go to films that I think I will enjoy.
(170 words)

Although there are some mistakes (very careful instead of very carefully, lose instead of miss, A enjoyable
instead of An enjoyable, memrable instead of memorable, and board instead of bored), this is quite a good
answer. The writer has answered the question by including both films she likes and films she hates, and giving
reasons for her opinions. Anyone reading the article would be interested in it. At 170 words, the answer is within
the word limit (120180 words). The writing is neatly laid out in paragraphs to introduce the different sections. The
neutral style is suitable for an article, e.g. no contractions are used and, although the article is written in the first
person (I), the style is not too informal. There is a wide range of vocabulary connected with the topic, and the
grammar and spelling are mainly accurate.
203
UNIT 4 Writing
Report (Part 2)
Read the exam question, then write your answer in 120180 words in an appropriate
style in the text box on the right. 1
As this is your last term at school, your teachers are organising a farewell weekend trip for all the students in your year.
They have asked you to write a report suggesting where the students might go, where they might stay, and what kinds of
things they might enjoy doing during the trip.
Write your report.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
204
Unit 4, Writing
Report on the farewell weekend for school leavers

Here are some suggestions for the farewell weekend for school leavers.
Where to go
What students would enjoy most is visiting a place where there is plenty to do and see. I would recommend
a visit to our capital city as many students have never been there. The visit would therefore be very
memorable and a good end to the school year.
Places to stay
There are many places which students could stay in the capital. However, what students need is cheap
accomodation which is not too far from the city centre. The best place would probably be a Youth Hostel,
where students could have breakfast and an evening meal without to spend too much money.
Activities during the trip
Students should definitely be taking on a sight-seeing tour of the city. I also recommend that they visit at
least one museum, and go to see a show after dinner one evening. I suggest that they are also given some
free time to go shopping, or visit one of the parks in the city.
(174 words)

Although there are some mistakes (places which instead of places where, accomodation instead of
accommodation, without to spend instead of without spending, be taking instead of be taken, and definitly
instead of definitely), this is quite a good answer. The writer has covered all the points requested in the report. At
174 words (excluding the title), the answer is within the word limit (120180 words). The report is neatly laid out in
sections with clear headings. The neutral style is suitable for a report, e.g. no contractions are used and, although
the writer uses the first person (I), the style is suitably impersonal. There are a variety of suggestions, a range of
grammatical forms, and the grammar and spelling are mainly accurate.
205
UNIT 5
Essay (Part 2)
Read the exam question, then write your answer in 120180 words in an appropriate
style in the text box on the right.
Your class had had a discussion about the advantages and disadvantages of tourism. As a follow-up, your teacher has asked
you to write an essay on the following topic, giving reasons for your opinions.
Write your essay.
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
206
Unit 5, Writing
Everybody would agree that tourism is one of most important industries in the world today but not everyone would agree
that the world would be a better place without it.
It is certainly true that tourism brings many advantages to a country. First of all, it brings in money, and secondly, it
provides jobs for local people. It also creates a market for locally produced arts and crafts. Some countries depend totally
for the money tourism brings in and the people living in those countries would have a much more difficult life without it.
On the other hand, tourism also has many disadvantages. Providing what tourists need often results in too much building in
beautiful places and a lose of local and national identity. Another point is that tourism can also be very bad for the
environment and can destroy places of natural beauty and historic monuments.
To sum up, tourism has both good and bad points. Perhaps the best way of deal with it is not to get rid of it completely but
to control its development.
(178 words)

Although there are some mistakes (of most important industries instead of of the most important industries, depend
totally for instead of depend totally on, a lose instead of a loss, environment instead of environment, and of deal
instead of of dealing), this is a good answer. The writer has written an essay which introduces the topic, takes into
consideration both the advantages and the disadvantages of tourism, and arrives at a conclusion. At 178 words (excluding
the title), the answer is within the word limit (120180 words). The essay is neatly laid out in paragraphs introducing the
different sections. The neutral style is suitable for an essay, e.g. no contractions are used and the style is suitably
impersonal. There is a range of link words leading the reader through the writers argument, and the grammar and spelling
are mainly accurate.
207
UNIT 6
Letter based on a set book (Part 2)
1 You have read a book in class that you very much enjoyed. Write a letter to an English friend recommending the book. Say
what was so special about the book and why you enjoyed it so much. Write your letter.
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
208
Unit 6, Writing
Dear Debbie,
How are you? Well, I hope.
Im writing to tell you about a book weve been read in class. Its called The No. 1 Ladies Detective Agency and its by a
writer called Alexander McCall Smith. Its about a woman in Botswana, Africa who sets out her own detective agency and
the problems she and her female assistant have trying making a success of it.
I really enjoyed reading this book. It was very different from other books I have read and very entertaining. Each case that
the lady detective, Mma Ramotswe, deals with shows a different picture of life in that country so I felt that I learned a lot
and it was fun to read. Mma Ramotswe is a very sympatric character and reading the book makes you feel that all human
beings can have useful and interesting lives.
Im sure you would enjoy reading it. If you cant find it where you live, you can always lend my copy.
Write soon,
All the best,
Angela
(169 words)

Although there are some mistakes (weve been read instead of weve been reading, sets out instead of sets up, trying
making instead of trying to make, diffrent instead of different, sympathic instead of sympathetic, and lend instead
of borrow), this is quite a good answer. The writer has written a letter which explains why the book is so special and why
she enjoyed it so much. At 169 words, the answer is within the word limit (120180 words). The letter is neatly laid out in
paragraphs introducing the different sections. The style is suitable for an informal letter, e.g. contractions are used and the
style is friendly and personal. The grammar and spelling are also mainly accurate.
209
UNIT 7
Review (Part 2)
The editor of your school magazine has asked you to write a review in English of a television series you have been
watching. The review must have the heading:
The best television series I have ever watched.
Write your review.
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
210
Unit 7, Writing
The best television series I have ever watched.

The best television series I have ever watched is a science-fiction series called Doctor Who. It is not a new series and there
have been many different doctors across the years but it has always been popular.
There are many things I really like about it. Firstly, although it is a series, each episode is a completely different story. The
stories are always exiting because there are different kinds of strange creatures who try to take over the world. The special
effects are also fantastic.
The doctor travels around in a telephone box which is really a space ship. He travels through time and visits different
periods of history. This makes the series more interesting because it shows what it might have be like to live then.
What is also really exiting is that the doctor and his assistant, a woman who travels with him, and the people they visit are
always in some terrible danger but they succeed to escape in the end.
I would recommend anyone interested in science fiction this series.
(174 words)

Although there are some mistakes (across the years instead of over the years, exiting instead of exciting, might have
be instead of might have been, succeed to escape instead of succeed in escaping, and I would recommend anyone
interested in science fiction this series instead of I would recommend this series to anyone interested in science
fiction), this is quite a good answer. The writer has written a review explaining why it is the best series he has ever watched
and recommending it to readers. The reader would have a clear impression of what the series is about. At 174 words, the
answer is within the word limit (120180 words). The review is neatly laid out in paragraphs introducing the different
sections. The style is suitable for a review, e.g. no contractions are used and the style is neutral and not too formal or
informal. The grammar and spelling are also mainly accurate.
211
UNIT 8
Writing Exercise 1 Question 1 Story (Part 2)

1 You have seen this advertisement in a newspaper and have decided to enter the competition.
So you think you can write?
Why dont you find out by entering our short story competition? Your story must begin with the following
words:
Anna was cycling back from college one evening when she heard a loud bang.
The best entries will be published in our weekly literary supplement.
Write your story.
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
212
Unit 8, Writing
Read the sample answer. Do you think it's a good answer? Look at
the comments below it and find out.
Anna was cycling back from college one evening in winter when she heard a loud bang. She looked round to
see what it was and noticed that a car has crashed into the wall of a near building.
Two men quickly got out the car and went to look at the hole they had made in the wall. They were wearing
masks and seemed to carrying guns. Then Anna noticed that the hole they had made was in the wall of the
bank. She suddenly reliased that the men were going to rob the bank. She quickly took out her mobile phone
and called the police. The person she spoke to said that someone would be there immediately.
A few minutes later a police car came round the corner. Its siren was making a loud noise. It was then that
Anna noticed a small group of people on the other side of the street with a camera. They were waving to
attract attention. Oh, no! she thought. They must be making a film!
(173 words)

Although there are some mistakes (a car has crashed instead of a car had crashed, near building instead of
nearby building, got out the car instead of got out of the car, to carrying instead of to be carrying, and
reliased instead of realised), this is a good answer. The story follows on from the prompt sentence. The story is
not too complicated and it does not go off the point. It is also interesting so the reader will be motivated to finish it
to find out what happens. The ending is quite unexpected and this, too, makes the story more interesting. At 173
words, the answer is within the word limit (120180 words). The story is neatly laid out in paragraphs introducing
the different sections and the narrative style is suitable for a story. The grammar and spelling are also mainly
accurate.
213
UNIT 9
Formal transactional email

1. You have seen this advertisement in a newspaper. Read the advertisement and the notes you have made.
See the world and earn some money!

If you like to travel and would like to earn some money this summer, ____ How long for?
why not come and work for us?
We need energetic young people in several
European countries to ____ Which ones?
pick fruit. We will pay for you to travel to your destination, ____ Any choice of transport?
provide you with meals and
accommodation, and pay you for the work you do. ____ How exactly?
If you are interested, email us on fruitpickers.com.
Write your email. You must use grammatically correct sentences with accurate spelling and punctuation in a style
appropriate for the situation.
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
214
Unit 9, Writing
From: Alice Martin

Sent: 1st February
Subject: Summer work
Dear Sir/Madam,
I am writing in reply to your advertisement in yesterday newspaper for fruit pickers. I am interested in
applying for a job but I need a little more information. First of all, how long would the job last? Would it be
all summer or just one or two weeks?
You mention several European countries. Could you possibly let me know exactly which countries you have
work in? Regarding travel to the destination, what form of transport do you pay for? Is it possible to
choose how we would like to travel?
I would also like to know how we would be pay for the work we do. Is it on daily basis or does it depend for
the amount of fruit we pick?
Im look forward to hearing from you soon.
Yours faithfully,
Alice Martin
(135 words)

Although there are some mistakes (yesterday newspaper instead of yesterdays newspaper, be pay instead of
be paid, on daily basis instead of on a daily basis, depend for instead of depend on, and Im look forward
instead of I look forward), this is quite a good answer. The writer has mentioned all the points referring to the
notes she has made. At 135 words, the answer is within the word limit (120150 words). The writing is laid out like
a formal email and the writer has used paragraphs to introduce the different sections. The style and vocabulary
are suitable for a formal email, e.g. no contractions are used, but more formal expressions like Could you possibly
let me know and look forward to hearing are used. The grammar and spelling are also mainly accurate.
215
UNIT 10
Informal transactional letter
Read the exam question, then write your answer in 120150 words in an appropriate style in the text box on the right. 1
You have seen this advertisement on your college noticeboard and bought the bicycle. Read the advertisement and the
notes you have made.
For sale Ladies bicycle
Fed up with paying to travel on public transport?
Nows your chance to get your own set of wheels.
My bicycle is in good condition and comes

with a useful saddle bag. ___ has holes in the bottom
The bike has four gears and is lightweight. ___ they dont work; heavy to push
Its a real bargain at 55. ___ not worth it

Contact me at this address:
Paula Sanders, 12 High Road, Bridgetown, Sussex S23
Write a letter to the person who wrote the advert. You must use grammatically correct sentences with accurate spelling and
punctuation in a style appropriate to the situation.
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
216
Unit 10, Writing, Exercise 1
Read the sample answer. Do you think it's a good answer? Look at
the comments below it and find out.
Dear Paula,
Thanks for delivering the bike to me this morning. Im sorry to say, however, that after Ive tried it out for
the first time, I was very disappointed with it. First of all, the saddle bags got several holes in the bottom
so its not use at all really. Secondly, although the bike has four gears, I find almost impossible to get them
to work.
Your advert described the bike as being lightweight. Unfortunately, I dont find it lightweight. Its very
heavy to ride and even more difficult to push.
I really dont feel that the bike was a bargain at all and I dont consider that it was worth the 55 I paid it.
Id like to return it to you and ask for a refund of my money.
Hoping to hear from you soon.

Laura Marsdon
(137 words)

Although there are some mistakes (after Ive tried it out instead of after Id tried it out, disapointed instead of
disappointed, its not use instead of its no use, I find almost impossible instead of I find it almost impossible,
and I paid it instead of I paid for it), this is quite a good answer. The writer has mentioned all the points referring
to the notes she has made. At 137 words, the answer is within the word limit (120150 words). The writing is laid
out like an informal letter and the writer has used paragraphs to introduce the different sections. The style and
vocabulary are suitable for an informal letter, e.g. contractions are used (dont, its, Id) and informal expressions
like Thanks for, bags got and at all really are used. The grammar and spelling are also mainly accurate.
217
ANSWER KEY
GRAMMAR PRACTICE
218
UNIT 1 ANSWER KEY
Unit 1, Grammar, Exercise 1 Unit 1, Grammar, Exercise 7
1. how old you are
2. what time it is 1. might
3. if your sister would like 2. could
4. your train gets in 3. should
5. if you can meet me 4. may
Unit 1, Grammar, Exercise 2
5. need
1. can / could
2. cant / am not able to / m not able to 6. must have been
3. Were you able 7. couldnt
4. can / could 8. mustnt
5. wasnt able / was not able
6. could / were able to Unit 1, Grammar, Exercise 8
7. can / could
8. can / could 1. picking up
Unit 1, Grammar, Exercise 3 2. come out
3. put off
1. A 4. picked up
2. C 5. take after
3. B 6. given up
4. B
5. A
6. C
7. B
8. C
1. has got to write / s got to write

2. have got to revise / ve got to revise
3. have got to buy / ve got to buy
4. has got to move
5. have got to answer
1. Students ought
2. We should
3. You shouldnt
4. We neednt
5. All young children have to
6. You dont have
1. neednt have arrived
2. didnt need to buy / didnt have to buy
3. didnt need to postpone / didnt have to
postpone
4. neednt have gone
5. didnt need to take / didnt have to take
6. neednt have written
219
ANSWER KEY UNIT 2

1. B 7. C
2. A 8. A
3. C 9. B
4. C 10. A
5. B 11. C
6. A 12. B
1. is doing, is raining / 's raining
2. owns, goes
3. are learning / 're learning, are visiting
4. prefer, hate
5. know, am hurrying / 'm hurrying
1. think
2. are you thinking
3. Do you feel
4. am not feeling / 'm not feeling
5. is expecting
6. do not expect / don't expect
7. try
8. are you trying
1. B
2. A
3. C
4. A
5. C
6. B
7. C
1. to be preserved
2. to do
3. to speak
4. to be used
5. to be disappearing / to disappear
6. to keep
7. to be dying out
8. to learn
9. to be protected
1. to have done
2. to do
3. to have been doing
4. to have been done
5. to be doing
6. to be done
1. B
2. C
3. B
4. C
5. A
6. B
220
ANSWER KEY UNIT 3
1. was walking 8. were doing
2. began 9. called
3. was shining 10. met
4. was blowing 11. was shopping
5. arrived 12. was listening
6. were watching 13. cooking / was cooking
7. rang 14. heard

1. were skiing 7. checked
2. wanted 8. occurred
3. was getting 9. were making
4. were beginning 10. saw
5. were looking 11. were shounting
6. arrived 12. caught

1. had 7. was sitting
2. was cycling 8. was talking
3. was looking 9. stopped
4. worked 10.forgot
5. was studying 11.was speaking
6. needed 12.arrived

1. were issued to students 4. was given to me
2. was being served 5. were being shown
3. were being given 6. werent told / were not told
1 used to be 6 wouldn't let

2 used to rent 7 used to do
3 would take 8 didnt use to do
4 would get up 9 used to arrive
5 used to go
1 decided 8 spotted
2 told 9 aimed
3 would rise / rose 10 found
4 would become / became 11 arrived
5 checked 12 was setting
6 was wearing 13 cooked
7 were travelling 14 was sleeping
221
ANSWER KEY UNIT 4
1. B 4. C 7. A
2. A 5. B 8. B
3. C 6. C 9. A
10.
1. will run out / are going to run out / will have run out
2. is going to rain / s going to rain / will rain
3. Shall I cook
4. will be travelling
5. will write / ll write / am going to write / m going to write
6. will have done / ll have done
7. are having / re having / have / will be having / ll be having
8. will finish / ll finish / will have finished / ll have finished

1. will be doing / ll be doing
2. will have finished / ll have finished
3. Will you be staying
4. will have completed / ll have completed
5. will the team be playing / ll the team be playing
6. wont have had / will not have had

1. was about to finish 5. were about to cook
2. is due to start 6. was on the point of breaking
3. was on the point of getting 7. is due to be held
4. were due to go

1. wont 5. having
2. [correct] 6. [correct]
3. travelling 7. be
4. finished
Unit 4, Grammar, Exercise 6 3 from 6 at
1 on 4 next 7 by
2 in 5 when
Unit 4, Grammar, Exercise 7 3 is bound to

4 is likely to
1 is bound to 5 are bound to
2 are likely to
4 had better not tell
Unit 4, Grammar, Exercise 8 5 had better ring
6 had better apologise
7 had better not go out
1 had better have
2 had better not forget
3 had better find
222
ANSWER KEY UNIT 5

1 confidently 4 emotionally
2 surprisingly 5 apparently
3 quickly 6 gradually

1 less stressful than 4 much more exciting than
2 far worse than 5 a lot healthier than
3 not as difficult / not so difficult 6 as quick as
1 have torn / ve torn 6 have visited / ve visited
2 have you been doing 7 have been painting / ve been painting
3 have just bought 8 have broken / ve broken
4 Have you ever tried 9 Have you seen
5 have been thinking / ve been thinking 10 have been working / ve been working
9 since
Unit 5, Grammar, Exercise 4 10 went
1 havent been / have not been / 've not been 11 were
2 since 12 for
3 waited 13 had
4 for 14 have lived
5 since 15 for
6 came 16 since
7 have been / ve been 17 left
8 has been / s been 18 has never spoken
4 ever
Unit 5, Grammar, Exercise 5 5 just
1 just 6 still
2 yet 7 never
3 still 8 already
5 has already landed
Unit 5, Grammar, Exercise 6 6 will be
1 have not arrived / havent arrived 7 have never been
2 will start / ll start 8 will take / ll take
3 will buy / ll buy 9 will not be able / wont be able
4 have not had / havent had 10 has broken
6 yet
1 for 7 already
2 [correct] 8 for
3 yet 9 since
4 since 10 [correct]
5 [correct]
223
ANSWER KEY UNIT 6
1 finished writing than 5 woken up than

2 arrived when 6 finished cooking when
3 finished breakfast when 7 put the phone down when
4 left home when 8 fallen asleep when
1 having them cleaned / going to have them cleaned
2 have them painted / have had them painted / ve had them painted / have painted them / 've painted them
3 having it repaired
4 had it built
5 had them designed
6 had them printed
1 had bought / d bought 4 had got / d got 7 had been / had gone
2 realised 5 told 8 visited
3 boarded 6 had seen / d seen
Unit 6, Grammar, Exercise 4 3 arrived 6 told
1 were called 4 had already spread 7 had never seen
2 had been started 5 took 8 had been brought

1 had eaten / d eaten 3 had visited / d visited 5 had been trying
2 had been raining 4 had been doing 6 had read / d read

1 woke 6 couldnt get / could not get
2 had been raining / d been raining / had rained / d 7 had left
rained 8 arrived / had arrived
3 had met / d met 9 had been working / d been working
4 knew 10 had finished / d finished
5 was

1 enough 3 too much 5 too much
2 too many 4 too many 6 enough
1 a little 3 a few
2 very little 4 very few
Unit 6, Grammar, Exercise 9 3 very few 6 very little
1 a few 4 a little 7 a little
2 very little 5 very few 8 a few
1 a little 5 Very few
2 a few 6 a few
3 a little 7 very little
4 very little 8 Very few
224
ANSWER KEY UNIT 7
1 climbed
2 would
3 [correct]
4 had
5 [correct]
6 was
7 doesnt / does not

1 asked me to do her
2 told them never to speak to him
3 asked the children to take off their / told the children to take off their
4 asked me to tell her my
5 told us not to forget to do our

1 who was coming
2 if anyone was / whether anyone was
3 where the museum was
4 I had been waiting for her / I'd been waiting for her
5 if I would phone him later / if Id phone him later / whether I would phone him later / whether Id phone him later
6 what time the train left / what time the train was leaving
4 wondered
1 suggested 5 threatened
2 warned 6 offered
3 complained 7 asked

1 Dont put your feet / Please dont put your feet / Do not put your feet / Please do not put your feet
2 Would you like to go
3 You have all been working / Youve all been working
4 Can you lend me / Could you lend me / Please can you lend me / Please could you lend me
5 Dont lie / Do not lie
6 Can you give me your / Could you give me your / Please can you give me your / Please could you give me your
7 Get out of / Please get out of
8 is always late / s always late

1 told us trains were / told us that trains were
2 to know how everyone felt / to know how everybody felt
3 suggested that we went / suggested we went
4 me if I would / me if Id / if I would / if Id
5 begged me not to tell
225
ANSWER KEY UNIT 8
1 fantastic, long, summer 3 strange-looking, tall, blonde 5 great, new, electronic

2 lovely, big, Spanish 4 excellent, little, Italian 6 expensive-looking, long, black
1 first conditional 4 second conditional 7 second conditional
2 third conditional 5 zero conditional 8 first conditional
3 zero conditional 6 third conditional
1 If you drop an egg, it breaks. 4 If you leave ice cream out of the freezer, it melts.
2 If I eat too much, I always put on weight. 5 If people drive above the speed limit, they break the
3 If people take regular exercise, they stay fitter. law.
1 will make yourself ill / ll make yourself ill
2 will not be able to buy anything / wont be able to buy anything
3 will visit Grandma / ll visit Grandma
4 will enjoy it / ll enjoy it
5 will help you / ll help you
6 will stop working / ll stop working
7 will not be able to get into the house / wont be able to get into the house / 'll not be able to get into the house

1 was 5 would join / 'd join 9 wouldnt make / would not make
2 would want 6 could / 'd not make
3 tidied 7 went 10 concentrated
4 would look 8 would save / 'd save
1 hadnt bought / had not bought 9 hadnt fallen / had not fallen
2 d have had / would have had 10 wouldnt have missed / would not have missed
3 d slowed / had slowed 11 hadnt played / had not played / hadnt been playing /
4 would have seen / 'd have seen had not been playing
5 wouldnt have looked / would not have looked 12 wouldnt have broken / would not have broken
6 hadnt gone to / had not gone to 13 wouldve been able to / would have been able to
7 d known / had known 14 d hired / had hired
8 would have met / 'd have met
1 in case 3 in case 5 unless
2 unless 4 Unless 6 in case

1A 3B 5B
2C 4A 6C
1B 4A 6B
2C 5C 7A
3A
Unit 8, Grammar, Exercise 10 4 could
1 had 5 [correct]
2 drunk 6 were / was
3 [correct]
226
ANSWER KEY UNIT 9
1 regrets not going / regretted not going / regrets not having gone / regretted not having gone
2 regret to inform
3 regret moving
4 regret leaving
5 regret to say / regret saying
6 regret to announce
7 regret not revising / regretted not revising / regret not having revised / regretted not having revised

1 wishes he had prepared more carefully / wishes hed prepared more carefully / wished he had prepared more carefully /
wished hed prepared more carefully
2 wish they had been a bit more adventurous / wish theyd been a bit more adventurous / wished they had been a bit more
adventurous
3 wish I had thought about it / wish Id thought about it
4 wish I had not been so greedy / wish I hadnt been so greedy / wish Id not been so greedy
5 wish I had never bought it / wish Id never bought it
6 wish I had taken the train / wish Id taken the train
7 wish I had remembered to do it / wish Id remembered to do it

1 could stop eating 5 was / were / could be
2 didnt send me / wouldnt send me / didnt send / 6 didnt talk / wouldnt talk
wouldnt send / did not send me / would not send me 7 wasnt / werent
3 had / could have 8 went / would go / could go
4 would tidy / tidied

1 regret 4 tell 6 lived
2 could 5 had 7 could
3 [correct]

1 hadnt broken up / had not 4 wouldnt put people down / 6 had not fallen through / hadnt
broken up would not put people down fallen through
2 falling out with 5 had not put me off / hadnt put
3 had put in / d put in me off

1 had told / d told 4 was / were
2 would not talk / wouldnt talk / did not talk / didnt talk 5 did not have / didnt have
3 could 6 would come
1 remember getting 5 remember to buy / remembered to buy
2 tried to make out 6 stopped to ask
3 stop complaining 7 remember having
4 tried cooking 8 stop talking
227
ANSWER KEY UNIT 10
1 After finishing 4 When crossing / While crossing
2 When travelling / Before travelling 5 before leaving
3 after arriving 6 When booking / While booking / Before booking

1 is needed 3 will be repaired 5 was stolen
2 had to be sent 4 has been built 6 ought to be sent / should be sent

1 who / whom 5 [correct] 9 who / that
2 that / which 6 which 10 which
3 that 7 that / which
4 where 8 [correct]

5 who knocked at the door
1 we caught 6 whose parents
2 we ordered 7 where I was educated
3 who looked after me 8 I lost
4 that I rented
1 where I did
2 who is taking
3 that was painted by Monet / painted by Monet / by Monet
4 whose book
5 that I saw yesterday / I saw yesterday / which I saw yesterday
6 which takes place in the mountains / that takes place in the mountains
1 [correct] 7 who 13 [correct]

2 who 8 where 14 who / that
3 whose 9 [correct] 15 where
4 [correct] 10 when 16 whose
5 that / which 11 [correct]
6 [correct] 12 where

1 which / that runs 4 which is
2 who painted 5 who was elected
3 which you can do 6 which / that are covered
1 which are called the Pyrenees

2 which is particularly low in the summer
3 which sells quality goods
4 which was shot in Spain
5 whose father was a write
228
Reading
Answer Key
229
Unit 1, Reading
Unit 1, Reading, Exercise 1
1. a 4. d 7. c
2. a 5. d 8. c
3. d 6. a
1. multi-coloured
2. fresh
3. stimulating
4. vivid
5. stunning
6. bright
1. top
2. minute
3. rights
4. set
5. minute
6. shot
7. rights
8. top
9. shot
10. set
Unit 2, Reading
Exercise 1
1. G The words It also offers refer back to learning a language is fun in the previous sentence by introducing more
points in favour of learning a language. The sentence following the gap continues to give more points with the words
Added to which ...
2. C The words Even with only a slight grasp of the language and far easier and more pleasurable refer back to the words
the rewards were instant in the previous sentence.
3. A The word method refers back to ways to do it in the previous sentence.
4. H The word either refers back to the comparison of two types of language course discussed in the previous two
sentences. Mentioning a qualified teacher links the sentence back to the word courses in the two previous sentences
and the words professionally-trained teachers earlier in the paragraph.
5. B You need to be tolerant and respectful of others refers back to it takes a certain kind of person in the previous
sentence, and total immersion experience is what is being described in the rest of this paragraph.
6. F Mentioning how fast learners and perfectionists can progress refers back to the previous sentence:Progress is also
entirely personal.
7. D References to the script and the soundtrack refer back to the DVD mentioned in the previous sentence and the words
view in numerous languages or provide foreign subtitles.
Exercise 2
1B
2B
3C
4D
5C
6B
230
Exercise 3
1 increase little by little
2 manage with what you have
3 enter a discussion or argument
4 reach someone who is ahead
5 repeat or revise
6 start doing (something) enthusiastically
Unit 3, Reading
Exercise 1
1 C Text C says Some ranches are not known for eco-principles, but the Estancia Los Potreros ...certainly is. It uses solar and
wind power and the cattle and horse farm is completely organic.
2 A Text A says Visitors stay at one of three different places, then adds Unless you can afford a luxury price tag, the
Township is the best bet.
3 B Text B mentions a visit to a cattle auction.
4 A Text A says that the real attraction of theWilderness Ranch is the extreme isolation. Other ranches in the text may be in
remote locations, but this is not mentioned in the text.
5 D Text D mentions both travelling experiences and competitive events. These are the cattle drives, ranch-to-ranch safaris,
trans-Andean expeditions ... and the Gaucho Games, which are competitions on horseback for all ages.
6 C Text C says that the Estancia Los Potreros, in Argentina, dates back to 1574.
7 B Text B mentions a week-long ride on part of the old Chisholm Trail, a 19th-century link between Texas ranches and ...
Kansas.
8 D Text D says that guests eat communally in the family dining room. Texts B and C mention the families that own the
ranches, but they dont say whether guests are treated like members of the family by them.
9 A Text A mentions nightly music and entertainment in the Swinging Arm Caf.
10 B Text B says Guests are encouraged to join in with seasonal tasks on the ranch, implying that they are invited or asked to
do so. Text C says that guests can join in farm activities, but there is no mention of whether they are encouraged to do so or
whether those activities happen throughout the year.
11 C Text C says The horses on the ranch are Peruvian Pasos, exceptionally sure-footed when rounding up the cattle on
mountainous terrain.
12 D The ranch in Text D has vast herds of Herford cattle. No other type of cattle is mentioned in the texts.
13 A Text A mentions that the Wilderness Ranch isalways full, so pre-planning is essential.
14 D Text D says Full board, riding and fishing, and transfer costs from the airport are included in the price. The other texts
mention the activities that the ranches offer, but not whether they are included in the price.
15 C Text C says Guests stay in adobe (mud and straw) buildings which have en-suite bathrooms as well as other up-to-date
facilities.

Correct answers:
1 transfer 5 full
2 up-to-date 6 en-suite
3 twin 7 remote
4 air-conditioned 8 luxury

1 outback
2 highlights
3 downside
4 livestock
5 daybreak
6 day trip
231
Unit 4, Reading
Exercise 1
1 (B) Incorrect
The text says that Jack did not care to knock at the great kitchen doors for fear of being taken for a beggar. For fear of
means wanting to avoid something happening, rather than being nervous about something. Jack was not nervous about
who might open the door if he knocked.
2 (C) Incorrect
The schoolmaster doesnt ask Jack any questions about who he was or what he was doing there, but instead says If you
have a question to ask, you may ask it of me.
3 (C) Incorrect
The writer doesnt mention whether Jack thought he had been sympathetic to the schoolmaster or not.
5 (B) Incorrect
The text says Jack had never before been alone or dreamed of being alone with such a person. Jack may be unsure about
how to greet Mr Jonas, but this is not mentioned in the text.
6 (D) Incorrect
The text doesnt say that he was too frightened to say anything, but that he was seized by a painful doubt.
7 (D) Incorrect
The text says that Mr Jonas was walking with acandlestick in each hand, the flames pointing straight upwards, meaning that
the flames were burning strongly and there was no wind to put them out.
8 (C) Correct
The text says Later, Jack wondered how much money Mr Jonas would in fact have offered him if he had had the sense to
accept it. The writer adds that anyone who has been poor will sympathise with him in this matter.
Unit 4, Reading, Exercise 4/2

1B
2A
3B
4A
5B
6A
7B

1 ground surrounded by a wall next to a building
2 part attached to a larger building
3 not the main way into a building
4 stair separating one level from another
5 a room just inside the entrance
6 a set of stairs
7 all the rooms on the same level
8 a narrow corridor leading to rooms
232
Unit 5, Reading
Exercise 1
1 D - Many refers back to the word aquariums in the previous sentence. The words the third top-paying attraction in Italy in
the sentence after the gap refer back tospectacularly successful as tourist attractions in the missing sentence.
2 G - The words an even bigger tank in the missing sentence refer back to a shark tank the size of a football field in the
previous sentence.
3 A - The words If thats the case and youre in for a big surprise in the missing sentence refer back to Maybe the last
aquarium you visited and the description of a older aquarium with a few modest tanks in a gloomy cellar in the previous
sentence.
4 F - The words these magnificent spectacles refer back to the dreamy and hypnotic water ballets, in the previous
sentence, that have the power to charm even the most stressed-out adults.
5 H - The word it in the missing sentence refers back to the Cit de la Mer in the previous sentence. The words is more
successful than its creators ever imaginedare explained in the following sentence, which says: It had already received its
millionth visitor by July 2006 .
6 B - The words the vessel refer back to the submarine mentioned in the previous two sentences. The sentence after the
gap follows on from the information that the submarine tour takes 45 minutes by saying: You should allow about three
hours to see all of the Cit de la Mers permanent features .
7 C - The words so much so that it takes nearly a million gallons of seawater refer back to the statement that the aquarium
is absolutely massive in the previous sentence.

1A
2B
3B
4A
5B
6A
7B
8A

1 exhibitions
2 a hit
3 events
4 collections
5 spectacles
6 attractions
233
Unit 6, Reading
Exercise 1
Correct answer:
1 D The person in Text D says that his school is best known as the setting for the 2000 film Remember the Titans about an
ethnically divided school. He says that the school remains quite racially and ethnically diverse and that in 2007, a group of
his students set out to illustrate that diversity in a 112-page, duotone book of photography.
2 B The person in Text B says Having their poems in a show has been significant for the students. Its expanded their
horizons, making them feel valued.
3 C The person in Text C says They also made marketing materials for their bands. They made posters, T-shirts and album
covers.
4 A The person in Text A says that teachers sent students out into the town to interview residents who were old enough to
remember what life in the town used to be like.
5 B The person in Text B says that studentsalternate a week of school with a week of school-coordinated work in local
businesses.She says this makes class time extremely precious because students still have to pass their final exams.
6 A The person in Text A says that what used to be considered a dying industrial town has now been put firmly on the map
by this dedicated group of young local historians.
7 D The person in Text D says I threw out the idea to my students about making a book. He saysI had envisioned a book
focused on the different ethnic aspects of the school.
8 C The person in Text C says a lot of mums dropping off their daughters wanted to join in too.
9 A The person in Text A says that the students decided to create a website featuring their huge body of historical research,
photographs and documentaries.
10 B The person in Text B says that although class time is extremely precious, she tries to spend five days every semester on
writing poetry.
11 D The person in Text D says I had envisioned a book focused on the different ethnic aspects of the school, but the students
wanted to focus on diversity in a broader way: individuals talents and backgrounds.
12 C The person in Text C says We worked on stage presence with the girls, which helped them to get over their nerves and
build up their confidence a little bit.
13 A The person in Text A says that teachers wanted to engage students in a really interesting community study and
mentions sending students out into the town to interview residents. She later mentions that the students have now become
a dedicated group of young local historians.
14 B The person in Text B says that although time isextremely precious and students have to pass their final exams, she tries
to spend five days every semester on writing poetry. Later she says that writing poetry with students hasexpanded their
horizons, and that its a testament to the value both of art and of a second chance.
15 C The person in Text C says Some people just couldnt believe that wed got the girls to play a song in a week especially
when some had never played an instrument before.

1 B completing
2 A become known
3 B widened their experience
4 B control their fear
5 A of different nationalities and cultures

1 threw out
2 join in
3 build up
4 drop me off
5 figure out
6 found out
7 get over
8 set out
234
Unit 7, Reading
Exercise 1
1 (C) Incorrect
The writer says For many years I have wanted to visit Cuba, and later adds Ive waited too long to go to Cuba, so we know
that he has not yet been there.
2 (A) Incorrect
The writer says that five hundred years agoCuba had no gold, and sugar, coffee and tobacco came 200 years later.
3 (B) Incorrect
A lexicon usually means the collection of all the words used in a language or a dictionary of these words, but in this case the
writer says that the buildings are like a lexicon; he is not talking about a specific book.
4 (C) Correct
The writer quotes Hemingway, who said that for beauty, only Venice and Paris surpass Havana, meaning that he thought
that only those two cities were more beautiful.
5 (C) Incorrect
The writer says George Keppel, an English earl, captured Havana for King George in 1762, but swapped it for Florida a year
later. The British exchanged it in the 1700s, or the 18th century, not the 1800s.
6 (B) Incorrect
The writer mentions that Che Guevaras son is project director of the Che Guevara Studies Center in Havana, but doesnt
mention whether he will visit this place.
7 (B) Correct
The writer says what has really attracted me to Cuba for so long is its turbulent history.

1 romantic
2 natural
3 irresistible
4 historical
5 famous
6 favourite
7 political
8 economic

1A
2B
3A
4B
5A
6B
7A
1 realised
2 propose
3 confirm
4 proclaimed
5 prompted
6 respond / responds
7 assembled
235
Unit 8, Reading
1 C - The mention of the writer being charged 33 euros and the cellophane wrapping for my three shirts refers back to
collecting my weighty pile of damp clothes from the cleaners in the previous sentence.
2 F - I straightened up continues on from bent down in the previous sentence. Mention of a slight pain where my vertebrae
turned into hips refers back to the previous line where the writer says he felt something snap in his back.
3 A - The writer says a pain caused him to fling off his rucksack in the previous sentence. He says I had forgotten my waist-
strap, referring to a part of his rucksack that was still attached to him, so the falling rucksack pulled me down to the grass
verge.
4 E - It refers to the rucksack, and so its loss would complicate matters considerably refers back to Should I leave my
rucksack by the road? and No, I decided in the previous two sentences.
5 B - Hobbling round the bar reminds us that he crept into the bar earlier in the paragraph. An L-shaped back refers back to
the hard-backed chair mentioned earlier in the paragraph.
6 H - In the previous sentence the writer says that there were no bus routes across the hills. In the missing sentence, the
writer says So I decided on plan two, which meant that I would hitchhike.
7 D Three stopped, but they were only going a kilometre refers back to only six cars passed in the previous sentence.

1 damp
2 rise
3 strides
4 optimism
5 habit
6 instinctively
7 fatal
8 seize up
9 sympathy

1 rise
2 raise
3 damp
4 humid
5 drop
6 fell
7 sympathetic
8 kind
9 sensitive
10 sensible
11 discussed
12 argue
236
Unit 9, Reading
1 C The person in Text C says shes the person I always go to when Im feeling a bit low and need cheering up.
2 D The person in Text D says we have the same likes and dislikes clothes, food, films, that kind of thing.
3 B The person in Text B says I dont think weve once had an argument about anything.
4 C The person in Text C says One day I might have grandchildren of my own, and Id really like to be the sort of
grandmother shes been to me.
5 D The person in text D says We actually went to school together.
6 A The person in Text A says there are times when she can be really awkward and Sometimes Im convinced that she says
things just to wind me up. He says that sometimes we end up falling out with each other.
7 B The person in Text B says I dont go to him with every little problem I have, but I know that if there was a crisis, I could
always turn to him for help.
8 A The person in Text A says in many ways, its surprising that Polly and I are still so close after all this time.
9 D The person in Text D says When youve known each other for such a long time, you can usually predict what somebodys
going to say next, and how theyll react to a certain situation.
10 A The person in Text A says You have to make allowances and tolerate things you wouldnt normally be happy about
otherwise you wouldnt be real friends.
11 B The person in Text B says we tend not to speak to each other much during working hours. She adds Thats the way I
prefer it, actually. I dont like everyone knowing who Im friendly with.
12 C The person in Text C says She has masses of knowledge and experience, and shes passed such a lot on to me and its
not the kinds of things you might find by reading books.
13 A The person in Text A says Sometimes Im convinced that she says things just to wind me up.
14 B The person in Text B says hes one of those people youd have complete faith in, no matter what happened.
15 CThe person in Text C says I know that some people think the older generation is a bit stuffy and out of touch, but they
havent met my grandmother. Later, she says Ive never felt that there was any generation gap between us because shes so
young at heart.
1 be really good friends

2 try to make someone angry
3 always do something thats annoying
4 decide to ignore someones faults
5 put up with something
6 trust absolutely
7 ask someones advice
8 not see the funny side of things
9 make someone feel happier
10 have been friends for ages

1 young at heart
2 predictable
3 bright
4 awkward
5 moody
6 well-organised
7 dependable
8 stuffy
237
UNIT 10 READING
1 (B) Incorrect
The writer doesnt say that John Webber regrets having to send the cup to the auction room. The writer implies that he
wishes he had taken more care with it.
2 (C) Correct
The writer says that it was made somewhere in the vast empire which spread from Persia, then adds The skill of the Persian
empires metalworkers, who made exquisite objects in sheet gold and silver, was renowned.
3 (C) Incorrect
This is not the correct meaning of the expression to have a good eye.
4 (C) Incorrect
John Webber says that his grandfather was always picking up all sorts of things everywhere he went, but doesnt suggest
that he came across the cup somewhere by chance.
5 (C) Incorrect
The writer doesnt say that Johns grandfather wanted to send the cup to be tested; he called in a researcher when the
family was preparingto move house, and the researcher sent it for testing on the advice of the British Museum.
6 (C) Incorrect
The writer doesnt suggest that John Webber was afraid that nobody would want to buy the cup.
7 (D) Incorrect
The writer says that the cup was sold to a mystery buyer standing at the back of the auction room. The writer adds He
apparently wanted to add the cup to his family collection.
8 (C) Incorrect
John Webber says She has a new home now, referring to the cup and its new owner.

1B
2B
3A
4B
5A
6A

1 call in
2 hold onto
3 head for
4 melt down
5 pack up
238
Key Word
Transformations
Answer Key
239
EXTRA PRACTICE ANSWER KEY
Extra practice, Key word transformations, Exercise 1

1 to make the most of 6 will have finished by
2 it doesnt/does not matter to 7 will (have) run out
3 were you able to 8 isnt/is not very keen on
4 take eight away/away eight from 9 asked Peter if he had/he'd
5 took part in 10 had gone by
1 could have done with havent/have had it out for

2 of putting up with 7 despite the fact that we
3 in spite of the rain 8 John has gone/come down
4 is/'s bound to be 9 found the film really boring
5 you lend me 10 had better go
6 havent/have not fallen out for /

1 came up against 6 ought to be preserved by
2 wish I had/Id applied 7 have not/havent finished their/the match
3 has nothing to do with 8 me when your plane lands
4 looking forward to seeing 9 used to be spent
5 has picked up 10 do you any harm
1 is the difference between 7 how about taking/how about you take
2 was not/wasnt as big as 8 has been teaching us/has been our teacher for/has
3 not have turned down taught us for
4 advised me to spend 9 appears to be rising/going up
5 was much more interesting than 10 were on our way
6 will take care of

1 like the look of 6 could have forgotten
2 have fallen through 7 to blame yourself/yourselves
3 told me not to forget/to remember 8 must be interested in/must have an interest in
4 know if anyone had noticed 9 didnt/did not put you off
5 to pick up 10 is the third time
240
1 am too exhausted to 7 was set up by
2 took part in 8 neednt/need not have booked
3 is the competition taking place 9 making/to make up his mind
4 will have/need to be sent making/to make his mind up
5 asked me if I was 10 was set back
6 only I had not/hadnt bought

1 from top to bottom 6 were/was taller I could
2 is more expensive than 7 put me through to
3 brought it home to 8 what we need is
4 get round to tidying 9 who this umbrella belongs to
5 to make yourselves at 10 who/that came up with

1 made their way 6 was held up by fog
2 was not/wasnt able to finish 7 in urgent need of help
3 blame me for breaking 8 so that I could learn
4 fed up with watching 9 forget to take/bring back
5 (really) gets me down 10 on our way home

1 has changed her mind 6 nowhere near as much
2 wish (that) Kevin would stop 7 takes place/will take place/is taking place on
3 to know if we were 8 not much to look
4 expenditure is more/greater than 9 is no longer any demand
5 see the/any necessity of/in 10 do not/dont regret studying

1 to cut back on 6 if I felt like going
2 was no doubt in the 7 had concentrated she would have/she'd have
3 if anyone brought up 8 if you could tell
4 have been learning English for 9 always find nature programmes fascinating
5 is being brought/moved forward 10 suggested (that) we should go
241
VOCABULARY
ANSWER KEY
242
UNIT 1
Unit 1, Vocabulary, Exercise 1
1. generation 7. decision
2. reality 8. happiness
3. disappointment 9. impression
4. laziness 10. satisfaction
5. beauty 11. determination
6. generosity
1. let 6. bring
2. meet 7. about
3. give 8. get
4. have 9. need
5. cant 10. see
1. One way or another 4. By the way
2. No way 5. way out of
3. way of life 6. out of the way
1. unforgettable 5. imperfect
2. inexpensive 6. untrue
3. incorrect 7. dislike
4. disappear
1. collect 4. increase
2. study 5. buy
3. lift
1. keep up with 4. give up
2. come up with 5. stand up for
3. clear up 6. make up
243
1. said - The correct word here is said because it can be followed by that.
2. causing - The correct word here is causing, meaning making something happen, in this case, harm.
3. recommend -The correct word here is recommend, meaning to advise people to do something.
4. kept -The correct word here is kept meaning put in a particular place.
5. think -Think is the correct word here because it can be followed by of.
6. make -The correct phrase is make a noise.
7. stayed -The correct phrase is stay up late, meaning to stay awake for longer than usual before going to bed.
8. seems -Seems to have been means that something appears to have been the case, but the writer cannot be certain.
9. amount -The correct phrase is any amount of, meaning that it doesnt matter how much.
10. so -So is the correct word here, meaning therefore.
11. tell -The correct collocation with stories is tell.
12. experiences -The correct word here is experiences, in this case referring to the feelings, skills, knowledge and
enjoyment that people can get from playing computer games.
UNIT 2
1. take it back / take the shirt back 5. take in
2. takes up 6. taken over
3. takes after 7. take off
4. take 10 away / take ten away / take away 10 / take 8. take up
away ten 9. take to
1. C 5. A
2. A 6. B
3. C 7. C
4. B
1. if you would be free 4. if you could put / if you would put
2. if you could send me / if you would send me 5. if you would like to
3. if you would enjoy helping 6. If you could phone me / if you would phone me
1. participating in 6. mentioned
2. could you possibly 7. finally
3. take place 8. convinced
4. hand it in to 9. received
5. reply
1. part 5. care
2. easy 6. time
3. advantage 7. out
4. shape
1.
2. job 5. promotion
3. career 6. staff
4. salary 7. working
244
8. qualifications 9. employers
1. denying 5. advise
2. promise 6. Suggesting
3. claims 7. threatened
4. inform
1.
2. counting on 5. counting the cost of
3. counts 6. lost count of
4. count towards 7. count me in
UNIT 2 Use of Language
1. No - The correct phrase is there is no shortage of, meaning there are plenty of [bilingual signs in Wales]. The second
part of the sentence says you can see them everywhere.
2. to -The correct phrase is according to, meaning this is said by [most people in the UK].
3. Of -The correct phrase is the rest of, meaning the remaining part of something, in this case all the other parts of the
UK except Wales.
4. Own -The phrase of its own means something that belongs only to it in this case a culture that belongs to Wales.
5. did / could -The text states that Welsh poet Dylan Thomas did not speak Welsh, but contrasts this with his parents,
who did / could speak Welsh.
6. Since -The correct phrase is ever since, meaning for all the time since [1536].
7. Soon -As soon as expresses a link between two actions or events that happen immediately after each other. In this
case, immediately after the Welsh Language Act was passed in 1993, Welsh had equal status with English.
8. There - The correct phrase is There is no doubt that, which is used at the start of a sentence to introduce
information that the writer thinks is certainly true.
9. In -The correct phrase is In addition, which is used to express a further point about a subject, and here refers back
to the points made in the previous sentence to explain the survival of the Welsh language.
10. Over -Well over is the correct phrase, meaning a lot more than and referring here to fifty per cent of the Welsh
population.
11. Than -The correct phrase is rather than, meaning instead of. In this case the writer says that in the future tourism
may prove to be a friend instead of an enemy of Welsh.
12. Who - The correct word here is who, which refers back to those, meaning those people.
245
UNIT 3
1. traditional 4. dropping
2. biting 5. storey
3. loving 6. filled
1. kick myself 4. kicked off
2. kick up a fuss 5. kick in / kick down
3. was kicked out 6. kick my heels
1. although 4. so that
2. while 5. in addition
3. because 6. nevertheless
1. despite 4. despite
2. in spite 5. although
3. although 6. in spite
1. background music 5. new release
2. starring 6. the screen
3. acting 7. leading role
4. trailer 8. special effects
1. knowledge 6. recognition
2. interpreter 7. suspicion
3. collision 8. instruction
4. ignorance 9. painting
5. survival
1. terrified 5. bored
2. amusing 6. annoying
3. embarrassed 7. amazing
4. distressing
Unit 3, Use of English, Exercise 1

1. eventually - The adverb form is needed coming before agreed, describing when this happened.
2. satisfying - The adjective form is needed to describe the noun that follows: breakfast.
3. happily-The adverb form is needed here to describe the verb that follows: set off.
4. activity -The noun form is needed here following the adjective sporting.
5. improvement-The noun form is needed here as an object after the verb phrase began to see.
6. worst -The superlative form of the adjective is needed here to form the expression one of the + superlative adjective + I
had ever + verb.
7. sheltered-The adjective form is needed to describe a place, in this case, a spot to camp.
8. Unfortunately-The adverb form unfortunately is needed here to introduce a sentence describing a difficult or unhappy
situation.
9. entertainment-The noun form is needed here following the words not my idea of.
10. enthusiastic -The adjective form is needed here to describe the authors feelings following the words I suddenly felt.
The adjective does not need a negative prefix following the words less than.
246
57. Unit 4
1. miss 5. fall
2. lose 6. drop
3. advise 7. reach
4. warn 8. arrive

1. could give 4. suggest that the host families
2. should be 5. would also recommend going
3. recommends organising 6. suggested having dinner

1. What we must not forget is
2. What they probably dont want is / What they probably do not want is
3. What we must remember is
4. What students really need is
5. What is very important is
6. What we should remember is / What we mustn't forget is / What we should not forget is / What we shouldnt
forget is
7. What they ought to have are
1. could do with 5. do with/ do without

2. make do with / do with 6. has nothing to do with
3. as nothing to do with 7. do away with
4. do away with 8. could do with

1. bored 5. upset
2. excited 6. delighted
3. disappointed 7. impatient
4. curious 8. surprised

1. go down with 4. go over
2. go on with 5. go by
3. go in for 6. go off
247
1. havent/have not finished /The present continuous sentence becomes a present perfect sentence to express the
idea that the musicians have not finished rehearsing.
2. makes no difference or doesnt/does not make any difference /The correct phrase here is makes no difference [to
me] or doesnt make any difference [to me], expressing the idea that it is not important to me.
3. has no intention of recruiting or hasnt any intention of recruiting /The correct phrase here is have no intention of
(doing something), meaning to definitely not want or plan to (do something).
4. was written by /The passive form is needed here because the Oscar-winning films screenplay becomes the subject
of the sentence and the missing words are followed by by.
5. have been studying Chinese for /The past simple in the first sentence becomes the present perfect in the second
sentence to express the idea of the action continuing over a period of time with for.
6. do you want to live /The question Why do you want ---? is needed here to express the idea of being attracted to
doing something.
7. must be looking forward to /The correct phrase is be looking forward to. The modal form must is needed before
the verb to express certainty.
8. has been closed since last /The past simple in the first sentence becomes the present perfect in the second
sentence to express the idea of the action continuing since a particular time in the past.
59. Unit 5
1. Swept 4. Roaming
2. Bobbing 5. paddle
3. Stroll
1. Isolated 6. takes place
2. plenty of 7. Drawbacks
3. nearby 8. in search of
4. Reliable 9. make it out to be
5. Deserting 10. more and more
1. feel like 5. felt part of
2. felt strange 6. Feel free
3. feel up to / feel like 7. felt good
4. feel isolated
1. get away with 6. get on well with
2. get around to doing something 7. get together
3. get over 8. get through
4. get out of doing something 9. get nowhere with
5. get (somebody) down 10. get your message across
1. get over 6. get on well with
2. get me down 7. getting nowhere with
3. get together 8. get your message across
4. getting out of 9. get away with
5. get through 10. get around
248
1. gets me down 4. get around to / get round to
2. gets on well with 5. to get over
3. get out of
1. B 4. C
2. A 5. B
3. B
1. lies - The correct phrase is the secret lies in, which is used to introduce a previously unknown and important piece of
information and means the secret is to be found in.
2. growing- The correct phrase is a growing demand, meaning an increasing need for something.
3. convinced- The correct word here is convinced, meaning that the experts strongly believe that something is true.
4. about -The correct expression is do something about, meaning to face or attempt to solve a problem.
5. run out -The correct phrasal verb here is run out, meaning be completely used up or finished.
6. reason -The correct word here is reason because the next sentence introduces the reason why what is mentioned in
the previous sentence is happening.
7. because -The word because is needed here to link the statement made at the beginning of the sentence with an
explanation of why that statement is true.
8. thought -The correct expression here is are thought to be, meaning that people believe that this is the case.
9. risk -The correct phrase here is at risk. Danger would have been correct if the preposition here was in instead of at.
10. where - The relative pronoun where is needed here to complete the defining relative clause describing the word places.
11. However -The correct word here is however because it introduces a statement which contrasts with the previous
sentence and is followed by a comma which separates it from the next piece of information.
12. somewhere -The correct word here is somewhere, meaning that although the site has already been selected, it is either
unknown to the writer, or the writer doesnt want to say where it is.
60. Unit 6
1. looking into 5. looking after
2. look up to 6. Look out
3. looked through 7. look up
4. Looking back on
1. lying 5. Lie
2. laid 6. Lied
3. Lies 7. lies
4. Lay
1. who 5. for that reason
2. Although 6. However
3. because 7. when
4. which
1. from top to bottom 5. get to the bottom of
2. hit rock bottom 6. start at the bottom
3. the bottom has fallen out of 7. a bottomless pit
4. come bottom
249
1. a bottomless pit 5. hit rock bottom
2. come bottom 6. at the bottom
3. from top to bottom 7. bottom has fallen out of
4. get to the bottom
1. cut back on 5. cut out
2. cut off 6. cut across
3. cut in 7. cut it up
4. cut down
1. cuts across 5. cut out
2. cut off 6. cuts in
3. cut up 7. are cutting back
4. cut down / had cut down / d cut down
1. at - The correct phrase is at sea, meaning on the sea in a boat.
2. during / on- During or on can both be used here to show that the event happened while the family were still on the
fishing trip.
3. With -With is needed here before the words no power to express the fact that the boat has no power.
4. had -The past perfect passive is needed here to show that the family was reported missing before the search took place.
5. something - Here something expresses the idea that the mother thinks that a terrible thing has happened, but doesnt
know exactly what it is.
6. out / off- Both set out and set off can be used here to express the fact that the rescue services departed to search for
the family.
7. but / except -The correct phrase here is could do nothing but / except wait, meaning could only wait.
8. or- Or here completes the phrase either or meaning that one rescue team might find the family if the other did not.
9. which -Which is needed here to complete a non-defining relative clause which gives extra information about the small
red sail.
10. was - Was is needed here to complete the passive verb form was seen.
11. who -Who here refers to the helicopter pilot and completes a non-defining relative clause.
12. by -The correct phrase here is one by one, meaning one (person) at a time.
61. Unit 7
1. hang on 4. hang about
2. hang out 5. hang back
3. hang up 6. hang on
1. of watching 4. in listening
2. for forgetting 5. with doing / of doing
3. on taking 6. about going
1. make the most of 4. make do with
2. make out 5. make a habit of
3. make up
1. against 6. trouble
2. course 7. sheer
3. admit 8. doubt
4. extent 9. well
5. line
250
1. tour 5. voyage
2. travel 6. drive
3. trip 7. journey
4. flight 8. ride
1. see eye to eye 4. keep your eyes peeled
2. keep an eye on 5. have eyes in the back of your head
3. catch your eye 6. up to your eyes in
1. keep an eye on 4. keep your eyes peeled
2. up to my eyes in 5. caught my eye
3. have eyes in the back of my head 6. see eye to eye
Unit 7, Use of English
1. fantastic - The adjective form is needed to describe the noun trips.
2. beautiful - The adjective form is needed after the and before night sky.
3. surrounded - The shortened form of the passive [I am] surrounded is needed before by.
4. comfortable - The adjective form is needed after the subject,we, and the verb be.
5. being - The gerund form is needed after all about.
6. reluctance -The noun form, reluctance, is needed after the quantifier, some, to describe the feeling of being reluctant.
7. infinitely - The adverb, infinitely, is needed here to give more information about the word better.
8. equipment -The noun form, equipment, is needed here as an object after the words we have brought with us.
9. enthusiasm - The noun form, enthusiasm, is needed here after the possessive pronoun, our.
10.practical -The adjective form is needed after well be.

1. mist 5. hurricane
2. downpour 6. thunder
3. lightning 7. heat wave
4. blizzard 8. sleet
1. hurricane 5. lightning
2. blizzard 6. downpour
3. thunder 7. sleet
4. mist 8. heat wave
1. fumbled 6. leapt / bounded
2. stare 7. crouched / crept
3. flung 8. tiptoe
4. leap 9. froze
5. creeping / tiptoeing
1. delay the progress of 4. leave
2. leave 5. establish
3. write 6. begin and seem likely to continue
1. tiny 5. miserable
2. overweight 6. modern
3. narrow 7. blonde
4. pretty
251
1. look his age 5. look around / looked around
2. look ahead 6. like the look of
3. look after herself 7. never looked back / has never looked back / s
4. much to look at never
8. looked back
1. B 5. A
2. C 6. B
3. A 7. A
4. C
1. takes place annually - The phrasal verb to take place means to happen. It is followed by the adverbannually formed
from the adjective annual.
2. that / which came to the rescue - The relative pronoun that or which is needed here to refer to whoever or
whatever did the action. The correct phrase is come to the rescue meaning to rescue or help to rescue someone.
3. was cut off from - The phrasal verb to cut off means to prevent someone from reaching or leaving a place. The
passive was cut off is needed here with the preposition from.
4. made an enthusiastic dash / enthusiastically made a dash -The correct phrase is make a dash meaning to run
suddenly and quickly, in this case, towards the football player.
5. was too little time for -The correct phrase here is too little, meaning not enough. To have time for something means
to have time to do it.
6. were in urgent need of -To be in need of something means that you need something which you dont have or dont
have enough of: in this case, supplies. The adverb urgently becomes the adjective urgent and is placed before need.
7. do you find attractive about -The phrase to find attractive means to like or to be attracted by, and takes the
preposition about.
8. whose name was / is Swanson -The relative pronoun whose is needed here to complete the defining relative clause.
The present simple or the past simple form can be used here because the championship was in the past, but we can
assume that Swanson is still alive.
63. Unit 9
1. not capable of 4. unable to
2. laid back about 5. reluctant to
3. defensive about 6. have difficulty
1. break up with 4. catch up with
2. come down with 5. be fed up with
3. face up to
1. catch up with 4. coming down with
2. broken up with 5. face up to
3. fed up with
1. appeared 4. interested
2. mentioned 5. salary
3. additional 6. forward
1. cure 5. immunise
2. patient 6. outbreak
3. medicine 7. epidemic
4. treatment 8. quarantine
252
1. fall back on 4. fell through
2. fall in with 5. fell for
3. falling apart 6. fell out with
1. put out 4. put you off
2. put in for 5. put up with
3. putting people down
1. good salary 5. apply
2. self-employed 6. long hours
3. temporary 7. resign
4. part-time
1. mind -The correct phrase is to my mind, which means in my opinion. Both belief and opinion would be correct answers
here if the preposition in the text was in.
2. far -The correct phrase is far more, which means a lot more. Many would be correct if it was followed by a countable
noun, and lot would be correct if it was preceded by a.
3. understand - The correct word is understand, to complete I cannot really understand, meaning that the writer is unable
to work out in his mind why people have this attitude.
4. speed - The expression at top speed means as fast as possible.
5. explained - The correct word here is explained because it is the only word that can be used to introduce a reason why
something is true, and this reason follows this word in the text.
6. taking - The phrasal verb to take part means to participate in an activity; in this case, playing sport.
7. make-To make someone feel something means to cause or force them to feel it. The words cause and force are
incorrect here because they need to be followed by an object + to.
8. however -Whilst all of the words here can introduce a statement which contrasts with the statements before it in some
way, the correct word here is however because the other words cannot be followed by and.
9. describing -The correct word here is describing, here meaning talking about what happened in detail. The words
commenting and talking could also be correct if they were followed by a preposition.
10. fall out -The correct phrasal verb here is to fall out, meaning to have a dispute or argument.
11. way -The correct phrase here is way of life, meaning the way that you choose to live or something that influences how
you live, as here.
12. concerned -The correct phrase here is as far as I am concerned, meaning from my point of view.
64. Unit 10
1. turning down 4. turned out
2. turned back 5. turn over
3. turn into 6. turn down
1. turn over 4. turn down
2. turn down 5. turn back
3. turn into 6. turn out
1. changed the subject 4. change money / change my money / change some
2. change your mind money
3. change trains 5. change clothes / change my clothes
253
1. consideration 5. thoughtful
2. tactfully 6. difference
3. amusing 7. signature
4. suggestion / suggestions 8. completely
1. save 5. consumers
2. decrease 6. purchases
3. supply 7. sellers
4. income
1. market 6. factory
2. customers 7. earnings
3. brands 8. profits
4. products 9. companies
5. industry 10. merchandise
1. into 5. on
2. by 6. for
3. on 7. up
4. to
1. bring up 5. bring forward
2. bring out 6. bring back
3. bring off 7. bring down
4. bring in 8. bring about
1. bring it off 5. bringing down
2. brought forward 6. bring up
3. bringing in 7. brought about
4. brought out 8. bring back

1. disastrous -The adjective form is needed to describe the noun failure that follows.
2. unwillingly-The negative form of the adverb is needed here before the verb agree because the words that precede it
make it clear that the writer expected the event to be a failure.
3. impressive -The adjective form is needed to describe the words the introduction to the show which precede it.
4. athletic-The adjective form is needed to describe the pronoun it, which refers to the introduction to the fashion show.
5. surprisingly -The adverb form is needed here to complete the phrase surprisingly enough, which contrasts the second
clause of the sentence with the first.
6. untrue -The negative form of the adjective is needed following the conjunction but to describe this, which refers to the
saying that nothing is new in fashion.
7. attractive -The adjective form is needed to describe the things that the students had created for the fashion show.
8. entertaining-The adjective form is needed to refer to describe the whole thing, which refers to the fashion show.
9. stylish -The adjective form is needed to describe ones, which refers to the designs created for the fashion show.
10. incredibly -The word incredibly is needed here to be a quantifier for the word pleased which follows it, showing how
pleased the writer is.
254

FCE Fast Class - Vocabulary

Загружено:

Сведения о документе

Авторское право

Доступные форматы

Поделиться этим документом

Поделиться или встроить документ

Параметры публикации

Этот документ был вам полезен?

Это неприемлемый материал?

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

FCE Fast Class - Vocabulary

Загружено:

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

READING

1. How old are you? Can you tell me ----- ?

1. ---you lend me some money until tomorrow?

MODALS have got to Exercise 4

WHICH MODAL? Exercise 7

Present simple or continuous? Exercise 1

Present simple or continuous? Exercise 2

Present simple or continuous? Exercise 3

1. I ---- it's going to be a fine day today. (think)

Using Adverbs Exercise 4

1, We ---- watch TV after 10 o'clock because we're too tired.

a) often b) already c) hardly ever

to do, to be doing or to be done Exercise 5

Past simple or past continuous?

The Past Simple Exercise 5

1. The box office issued tickets for the concert to students.

1. I wont be coming to the party on Saturday.

Expressions of Time Exercise 6

1. Ive got an appointment at the dentists --- Wednesday afternoon.

1. It will definitely rain when we are on holiday. It always does.

HAD BETTER (NOT) Exercise 8

go out find tell apologise forget ring have

1. I -----an early night tonight because my exams start tomorrow.

UNIT 5 Making Comparisons Exercise 2

A. I 1---- ----- (not be) to the beach 2 ----- last year.

UNIT 6 -CAUSATIVE USE of HAVE- Exercise 2

UNIT 6 PAST SIMPLE or PAST PERFECT / active or passive - Exercise 4

1. When we went inside, I remembered that I ----- in the restaurant before.

UNIT 6 A LITTLE/VERY LITTLE/A FEW/VERY FEW Exercise 8

1. a small, but convenient quantity: _________________________________

UNIT6 A LITTLE/VERY LITTLE/A FEW/VERY FEW Exercise 9

UNIT6 A LITTLE/VERY LITTLE/A FEW/VERY FEW Exercise 10

1. Would you like some more cake? Theres -------- left.

UNIT 7 Reporting Statements Exercise 1

1. _____ Richard said that he had never climb a mountain before.

UNIT 7 Reporting Imperatives Exercise 2

1. Please do me a favour, Wendy said to me.

UNIT 7 Reporting Verbs Exercise 4

UNIT 7 Reporting Speech Exercise 6

1. Trains are running late, the guard said to us.

UNIT 8 ORDER of ADJECTIVES Exercise 1

2. They live in a ------ villa.

3. The police are looking for a ------ man.

4. Theres a(n) ------ restaurant on the corner of our street.

5. I bought a(n) ------ photo frame on the internet.

6. She wore a(n) ------ dress.

UNIT 8 CONDITIONALS Exercise 2

1. you / drop / an egg / it / break

UNIT 8 FIRST CONDITIONAL Exercise 4

a If everyone 1 ----- (be) rich, nobody 2 ----- (want) to do any work!

UNIT 8 The Third Conditional Exercise 6

1. Heres some extra money----- you need it.

1 If I were you, I ..... Sam.

UNIT 8 Conditionals Exercise 10

Expressing wishes about the past

1. Colin said the wrong thing at the meeting.

1. William cant stop eating chocolate!

1. I regret ending my relationship with Bob.

1 They need more time to finish the work.

1. Theres the museum. I did a project there last year.

1. Is this the restaurant you went to last week?

Non-defining relative clauses

Here are some meanings expressed by modal verbs.